advertisement
ROBOTICS
Product manual
IRB 6620LX
Trace back information:
Workspace R18-2 version a18
Checked in 2018-11-20
Skribenta version 5.3.012
Product manual
IRB 6620LX
IRC5
Document ID: 3HAC035737-001
Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
Except as may be expressly stated anywhere in this manual, nothing herein shall be construed as any kind of guarantee or warranty by ABB for losses, damages to persons or property, fitness for a specific purpose or the like.
In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of this manual and products described herein.
This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB's written permission.
Keep for future reference.
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB.
Original instructions.
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
ABB AB, Robotics
Robotics and Motion
Se-721 68 Västerås
Sweden
Table of contents
Table of contents
Protective stop and emergency stop ...........................................................
Emergency release of the robot axes ..........................................................
Make sure that the main power has been switched off ....................................
Safety risks during installation and service work on robots ..............................
Moving robots are potentially lethal ............................................................
First test run may cause injury or damage ....................................................
Work inside the working range of the robot ..................................................
Enabling device and hold-to-run functionality ...............................................
Risks associated with live electric parts .......................................................
The unit is sensitive to ESD .......................................................................
Hot parts may cause burns .......................................................................
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems ......................................
1.3.12 Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) .......................
Safety signals in the manual ......................................................................
Safety symbols on product labels ...............................................................
2 Installation and commissioning 47
Pre-installation procedure .........................................................................
Working range and type of motion ..............................................................
Frame configurations ...............................................................................
Lifting and securing the frame ...................................................................
Joining two frame tracks ...........................................................................
Lifting robot with fork lift accessory ............................................................
Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool ..................................................
Manually releasing the brakes ...................................................................
Orienting and securing the robot ................................................................
Setting the system parameters for a suspended or tilted robot .........................
Fitting equipment on robot .......................................................................
2.4.12 Inspecting and test running the e-chain before start-up ..................................
2.4.13 Loads fitted to the robot, stopping time and braking distances .........................
Robot cabling and connection points ..........................................................
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Maintenance schedule and expected component life ...............................................
Specification of maintenance intervals ........................................................
Maintenance schedule .............................................................................
Expected component life .........................................................................
Inspecting the oil level in axis-1 gearbox ......................................................
Inspecting the oil level in axis-2 gearbox .....................................................
Inspecting the oil level in axis-3 gearbox .....................................................
Inspecting the oil level in axis-4 gearbox .....................................................
Inspecting the oil level in axis-5 gearbox .....................................................
Inspecting the oil level in axis-6 gearbox .....................................................
Inspecting the information labels ................................................................
Inspecting the axis-1 mechanical stop pin ...................................................
Inspecting, signal lamp ............................................................................
Type of lubrication in gearboxes ................................................................
Changing oil, axis-1 gearbox ....................................................................
Changing oil, axis-2 gearbox .....................................................................
Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox .....................................................................
Changing oil, axis-4 gearbox .....................................................................
Changing oil, axis-5 gearbox .....................................................................
Changing oil, axis-6 gearbox .....................................................................
Lubrication of ball bearings and surface rollers .............................................
Replacing the SMB battery ........................................................................
Cleaning the IRB 6620LX ..........................................................................
Performing a leak-down test ......................................................................
Mounting instructions for bearings .............................................................
Mounting instructions for seals ..................................................................
Cut the paint or surface on the robot before replacing parts ............................
The brake release buttons may be jammed after service work .........................
Replacing the robot ................................................................................
Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2) ......................................
Replacement of cable harness, upper end ...................................................
Replacing the turning disk ........................................................................
Replacement of wrist unit .........................................................................
Replacement of the upper arm ...................................................................
Replacement of lower arm ........................................................................
Replacement of SMB unit .........................................................................
Replacing the brake release board .............................................................
Replacement of support roller in carriage ....................................................
Replacement of motor, axis 1 ....................................................................
Replacement of motor axis 2 .....................................................................
Replacement of motor, axis 3 ....................................................................
Replacement of motor, axis 4 ....................................................................
Replacement of motor, axis 5 , IRB 6620/6620LX ...........................................
6
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Table of contents
Replacement of motor, axis 6 ....................................................................
Replacement of gearbox 1 ........................................................................
Replacement gearbox axis 2 .....................................................................
Replacement of gearbox axis 3 ..................................................................
Replacement of gearbox, axis 6 .................................................................
Replacing the energy chain .......................................................................
Replacing cables in the energy chain ..........................................................
Introduction and calibration terminology ......................................................
Synchronization marks and axis movement directions .............................................
Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes .........................
Calibration movement directions for all axes ................................................
Description of Axis Calibration ..................................................................
Calibration tools for Axis Calibration ...........................................................
Installation locations for the calibration tools ...............................................
Axis Calibration - Running the calibration procedure ......................................
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
7
This page is intentionally left blank
Overview of this manual
Overview of this manual
About this manual
This manual contains instructions for:
• mechanical and electrical installation of the robot
• maintenance of the robot
• mechanical and electrical repair of the robot
Usage
Who should read this manual?
This manual is intended for:
• installation personnel
• maintenance personnel
• repair personnel
Prerequisites
This manual should be used during:
• installation, from lifting the robot to its work site and securing it to the foundation to making it ready for operation.
• maintenance work
• repair work and calibration
Maintenance/repair/installation personnel working with an ABB Robot must:
• be trained by ABB and have the required knowledge of mechanical and electrical installation/repair/maintenance work.
Product manual scope
The manual covers covers all variants and designs of the IRB 6620LX. Some variants and designs may have been removed from the business offer and are no longer available for purchase.
Organization of chapters
The manual is organized in the following chapters:
Chapter
Safety
Contents
Safety information that must be read through before performing any installation or service work on robot. Contains general safety aspects as well as more specific information on how to avoid personal injuries and damage to the product.
Installation and commissioning
Required information about lifting and installation of the robot.
Maintenance
Repair
Step-by-step procedures that describe how to perform maintenance of the robot. Based on a maintenance schedule that may be used to plan periodical maintenance.
Step-by-step procedures that describe how to perform repair activities on the robot. Based on available spare parts.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
9
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Overview of this manual
Continued
Chapter
Calibration
Decommissioning
Reference information
Contents
Calibration procedures and general information about calibration.
Environmental information about the robot and its components.
Useful information when performing installation, maintenance or repair work. Includes lists of necessary tools, additional documents, safety standards, etc.
Spare parts and exploded views
Complete spare part list and complete list of robot components, shown in the exploded views.
Circuit diagrams Reference to the circuit diagram for the robot.
References
Following manuals are referred to from inside of the product manual. All referred manuals can be found via myABB Business Portal, www.myportal.abb.com.
Reference
Product specification - IRB 6620
Product manual, spare parts - IRB 6620LX
Product specification - Linear Axis
Circuit diagram - IRB 6620 / IRB 6620LX
Operating manual - General safety information i
Product manual - IRC5
IRC5 with main computer DSQC 639.
Product manual - IRC5
IRC5 with main computer DSQC1000.
Document ID
3HAC025861-001
3HAC049110-001
3HAC036094-001
3HAC025090-001
3HAC031045-001
3HAC021313-001
3HAC047136-001
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant
Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum
Operating manual - Service Information System
3HAC050941-001
3HAC16578-1
3HAC050944-001
Application manual - Additional axes and stand alone controller
3HAC051016-001
Technical reference manual - Lubrication in gearboxes 3HAC042927-001
Technical reference manual - System parameters
Application manual - CalibWare Field 5.0
3HAC050948-001
3HAC030421-001
System manual - Automatic lubrication system (Güdel)
Installation guide - Gliding applications (IGUS)
Always download latest version from http://www.igus.com.
-
IGUS_installation-guide_en
Transport and startup - E-chainsystems (IGUS)
Always download latest version from http://www.igus.com.
Operating manual - TM-O Sizes 40-90 (Güdel)
Contains information for linear axes built before 2014.
Transport and startup of assembled e-chainsystems
D000679--001
Operating manual - TM-O 1-4 (Güdel)
Contains information for linear axes built after 2014.
D003806--001
Service manual - Gearbox unit HPG (Güdel)
Always download latest version from http://www.gudel.com.
18014398746814859--001
Continues on next page
10 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Revisions
Overview of this manual
Continued
Reference Document ID i
Operating manual - Toploader (Güdel)
Found on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
).
This Güdel manual details the complete ABB toploader linear unit, including the elastomer coupling for the motor shaft.
Since the manual is unique for ABB, Güdel does not provide it on their web site for download. This manual includes all information previously splitted into different manuals (se above)
546181387--001
This manual contains all safety instructions from the product manuals for the manipulators and the controllers.
C
D
-
Revision
A
B
Description
First edition
This revision includes the following additions and/or changes:
• Corrected tightening torques in sections
Lifting and securing the frame on page 59
, and
Joining two frame tracks on page 66 .
• Circuit diagrams are not included in this document but delivered as separate files. See
.
• List of standards updated, see
Applicable standards on page 341
.
The chapter Safety updated with:
• Updated safety signal graphics for the levels Danger and Warning , see
Safety signals in the manual on page 38
.
• New safety labels on the manipulators, see
Safety symbols on product labels on page 40 .
• Revised terminology: robot replaced with manipulator .
This revision includes the following additions and/or changes:
• Updates in chapter Calibration .
• Minor updates.
Minor updates.
This revision includes the following updates:
• A new block, about general illustrations, added in section
How to read the product manual on page 16
.
• Some general tightening torques have been changed/added, see updated values in
• The interval for changing oil in axis-2 gearbox is added to the maintenance schedule, see
Maintenance schedule on page 121 .
• Added
Safety risks during handling of batteries on page 35
.
• Added
Automatic lubrication system on page 114
.
• All data about type of lubrication in gearboxes is moved from the manual to a separate lubrication manual, see
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
• Edited information about securing the frame support (welded), see
Lifting and securing the frame on page 59
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
11
Overview of this manual
Continued
Revision
E
F
G
H
J
K
Description
This revision includes the following updates:
• Added section on page ?
.
• Added information about handling of signal from grease level sensor, see
Automatic lubrication system on page 114 .
• Corrected location of label for lifting, see
Inspecting the information labels on page 137
.
• Spare part number for wrist (standard) was wrong. Has been corrected.
• Corrected the method of inspecting oil level in the axis-6 gearbox, see
Inspecting the oil level in axis-6 gearbox on page 134 .
• A new SMB unit and battery is introduced, with longer battery lifetime.
This revision includes the following updates:
• Corrected interval for oil change in axis-4 gearbox,
Maintenance schedule on page 121 .
• Corrected spare part number for axis-1 motor.
• Added information about risks when scrapping a decommissioned robot, see
Scrapping of robot on page 339 .
• Spare parts and exploded views are not included in this document but delivered as a separate document. See Product manual, spare parts - IRB 6620LX .
This revision includes the following updates:
• Changed dimension of cable holder carrier screw, see
Replacement of cable harness, upper end on page 195
.
• Added new sections to the manual:
Robot transportation precautions on page 48
Working range and type of motion on page 53
Robot cabling and connection points on page 116
• Minor corrections.
This revision includes the following updates:
• The value for the system parameter Gamma Rotation is corrected, see
Setting the system parameters for a suspended or tilted robot on page 100
.
• Information is added about reducing the risk for vibrations, see
Optimizing the performance on page 111 .
• Improvements Foundry Plus added throughout the manual. New wrist cover and improved sealing on arm house cover, and more.
This revision includes the following updates:
• Additional information about the linear axis is added throughout the manual.
Published in release R17.1. The following updates are made in this revision:
• New standard calibration method is introduced (Axis Calibration). See
• Corrections due to updates in terminology for spare parts.
• Maintenance interval for changing the axis-1 gearbox oil is changed.
Continues on next page
12
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Overview of this manual
Continued
Revision
L
M
N
P
Description
Published in release R17.2. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Caution about removing metal residues added in sections about EIB/SMB boards.
• Information about minimum resonance frequency added.
• Bending radius for floor cables added.
• Updated list of applicable standards.
• Added a figure showing alignment of calibration pin and bushing (axis
1), see
Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1 on page 305 .
• Section
Start of robot in cold environments on page 118
added.
• Updated information regarding replacement of brake release board.
• Added section
Replacing the robot on page 185
.
• Updated information regarding disconnecting and reconnecting battery cable to serial measurement board.
• Added and updated references to Güdel.
• Definition of reference calibration clarified.
Published in release R18.1. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Information added about fatigue to Axis Calibration tool, see
Calibration tools for Axis Calibration on page 323
.
• Added sections in
General procedures on page 178
.
• Safety restructured.
• New spare part number brake release board (was DSQC563).
• Note added to calibration chapter to emphasize the requirement of equally dressed robot when using previously created reference calibration values.
• Information about myABB Business Portal added.
Published in release R18.2. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Information about new gearbox unit with elastomer coupling added.
Repair procedures for replacement of axis-1 gearbox and axis-1 motor are edited to refer to external documentation for the gearbox unit and the coupling.
Published in release R18.2. The following updates are made in this revision:
• Updated references.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
13
Product documentation
Product documentation
Categories for user documentation from ABB Robotics
The user documentation from ABB Robotics is divided into a number of categories.
This listing is based on the type of information in the documents, regardless of whether the products are standard or optional.
All documents can be found via myABB Business Portal, www.myportal.abb.com
.
Product manuals
Manipulators, controllers, DressPack/SpotPack, and most other hardware is delivered with a Product manual that generally contains:
• Safety information.
• Installation and commissioning (descriptions of mechanical installation or electrical connections).
• Maintenance (descriptions of all required preventive maintenance procedures including intervals and expected life time of parts).
• Repair (descriptions of all recommended repair procedures including spare parts).
• Calibration.
• Decommissioning.
• Reference information (safety standards, unit conversions, screw joints, lists of tools).
• Spare parts list with corresponding figures (or references to separate spare parts lists).
• References to circuit diagrams.
Technical reference manuals
The technical reference manuals describe reference information for robotics products, for example lubrication, the RAPID language, and system parameters.
Application manuals
Specific applications (for example software or hardware options) are described in
Application manuals . An application manual can describe one or several applications.
An application manual generally contains information about:
• The purpose of the application (what it does and when it is useful).
• What is included (for example cables, I/O boards, RAPID instructions, system parameters, software).
• How to install included or required hardware.
• How to use the application.
• Examples of how to use the application.
Continues on next page
14
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Product documentation
Continued
Operating manuals
The operating manuals describe hands-on handling of the products. The manuals are aimed at those having first-hand operational contact with the product, that is production cell operators, programmers, and troubleshooters.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
15
How to read the product manual
How to read the product manual
Reading the procedures
The procedures contain references to figures, tools, material, and so on. The references are read as described below.
References to figures
The procedures often include references to components or attachment points located on the manipulator/controller. The components or attachment points are marked with italic text in the procedures and completed with a reference to the figure where the current component or attachment point is shown.
The denomination in the procedure for the component or attachment point corresponds to the denomination in the referenced figure.
The table below shows an example of a reference to a figure from a step in a procedure.
8.
Action
Remove the rear attachment screws, gearbox.
Note/Illustration
Shown in the figure Location of gearbox on page xx .
References to required equipment
The procedures often include references to equipment (spare parts, tools, etc.) required for the different actions in the procedure. The equipment is marked with italic text in the procedures and completed with a reference to the section where the equipment is listed with further information, that is article number and dimensions.
The designation in the procedure for the component or attachment point corresponds to the designation in the referenced list.
The table below shows an example of a reference to a list of required equipment from a step in a procedure.
3.
Action
Fit a new sealing, axis 2 to the gearbox.
Note/Illustration
Art. no. is specified in Required equipment on page xx.
Safety information
The manual includes a separate safety chapter that must be read through before proceeding with any service or installation procedures. All procedures also include specific safety information when dangerous steps are to be performed.
Read more in the chapter
.
Illustrations
The robot is illustrated with general figures that does not take painting or protection type in consideration.
Likewise, certain work methods or general information that is valid for several robot models, can be illustrated with illustrations that show a different robot model than the one that is described in the current manual.
16
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.1.1 Limitation of liability
1 Safety
1.1 General safety information
1.1.1 Limitation of liability
Limitation of liability
Any information given in this manual regarding safety must not be construed as a warranty by ABB that the industrial robot will not cause injury or damage even if all safety instructions are complied with.
The information does not cover how to design, install and operate a complete system, nor does it cover all peripheral equipment that can influence the safety of the entire system.
In particular, liability cannot be accepted if injury/damage has been caused for any of the following reasons:
• Use of the robot in other ways than intended.
• Incorrect operation or maintenance.
• Operation of the robot when the safety devices are defective, not in their intended location or in any other way not working.
• When instructions for operation and maintenance are not followed.
• Non-authorized design modifications made in or around the robot.
• Repairs carried out by in-experienced or non-qualified personnel.
• Foreign objects.
• Force majeure.
Nation/region specific regulations
To protect personnel, the complete system must be designed and installed in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the standards and regulations of the country where the robot is installed.
To be observed by the supplier of the complete system
The integrator is responsible that the safety devices necessary to protect people working with the robot system are designed and installed correctly.
When integrating the robot with external devices and machines:
• The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in the safety function are interlocked in accordance with the applicable standards for that function.
• The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in the emergency stop function are interlocked in a safe manner, in accordance with the applicable standards for the emergency stop function.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
17
1 Safety
1.1.1 Limitation of liability
Continued
The integrator of the final application is required to perform an assessment of the hazards and risks (HRA).
Note
The integrator is responsible for the safety of the final application.
Safe access
The robot system shall be designed to allow safe access to all areas where intervention is necessary during operation, adjustment, and maintenance.
Where it is necessary to perform tasks within the safeguarded space there shall be safe and adequate access to the task locations.
Safety zones, which must be crossed before admittance, must be set up in front of the robot's working space. Light beams or sensitive mats are suitable devices.
Turntables or the like should be used to keep the operator out of the robot's working space.
A safety fence is recommended to ensure safeguarded space. Sufficient space must be provided around the manipulator to protect those working with or on it from hazards such as crushing.
The fence or enclosure must be dimensioned to withstand the force created if the load being handled by the robot is dropped or released at maximum speed.
Determine the maximum speed from the maximum velocities of the robot axes and from the position at which the robot is working in the work cell (see the section
Robot motion in the Product specification ).
Also consider the maximum possible impact caused by a breaking or malfunctioning rotating tool or other device fitted to the robot.
Safe handling
Users shall not be exposed to hazards, including slipping, tripping, and falling hazards.
It must be possible to safely turn off tools, such as milling cutters, etc. Make sure that guards remain closed until the cutters stop rotating.
It should be possible to release parts by manual operation (valves).
Safe design
Emergency stop buttons must be positioned in easily accessible places so that the robot can be stopped quickly. If any of the buttons do not stop all the robot workcell motion, each emergency stop button must be marked, if more than one is provided, to indicate its designated safety function.
Grippers/end effectors must be designed so that they do not drop work pieces/tools in the event of a power failure or a disturbance to the controller.
Unauthorized modifications of the originally delivered robot are prohibited. Without the consent of ABB, it is forbidden to attach additional parts through welding, riveting, or drilling of new holes into the castings. The strength of the robot could be affected.
18
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.1.2 Protective stop and emergency stop
1.1.2 Protective stop and emergency stop
Overview
The protective stops and emergency stops are described in the product manual for the controller.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
19
1 Safety
1.2.1 Fire extinguishing
1.2 Safety actions
1.2.1 Fire extinguishing
Note
Use a CARBON DIOXIDE (CO
2
) extinguisher in the event of a fire in the manipulator or controller.
20
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.2.2 Emergency release of the robot axes
1.2.2 Emergency release of the robot axes
Description
In an emergency situation, the brakes on a robot axis can be released manually by pushing a brake release button.
How to release the brakes is described in the section:
•
Manually releasing the brakes on page 95 .
The robot may be moved manually on smaller robot models, but larger models may require using an overhead crane or similar equipment.
Increased injury
Before releasing the brakes, make sure that the weight of the robot does not increase the pressure on the trapped person, further increasing any injury.
DANGER
When releasing the holding brakes, the robot axes may move very quickly and sometimes in unexpected ways.
Make sure no personnel is near or beneath the robot.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
21
1 Safety
1.2.3 Make sure that the main power has been switched off
1.2.3 Make sure that the main power has been switched off
Description
Working with high voltage is potentially lethal. Persons subjected to high voltage may suffer cardiac arrest, burn injuries, or other severe injuries. To avoid these personal injuries, switch off the main power on the controller before proceeding work.
Note
Switch off all main power switches in a MultiMove system.
Spot welding cabinet
Wait for 5 minutes to let the capacitors discharge after the power has been switched off.
DANGER
Even if the main switch is switched off, the capacitors can cause electric shock if not given the time to discharge.
22
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.3.1 Safety risks during installation and service work on robots
1.3 Safety risks
1.3.1 Safety risks during installation and service work on robots
Requirements on personnel
Only persons who know the robot and are trained in the operation and handling of the robot are allowed to maintain the robot. Persons who are under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other intoxicating substances are not allowed to install, maintain, repair, or use the robot.
• Those in charge of operations must make sure that safety instructions are available for the installation in question.
• Those who install or service/maintain the robot must have the appropriate training for the equipment in question and in any safety matters associated with it.
• Personnel should be trained on responding to emergency or abnormal situations.
General risks during installation and service
The instructions in the product manual must always be followed.
Never turn the power on to the robot before it is properly fixed and bolted to its foundation/support.
Make sure that no one else can turn on the power to the controller and robot while you are working with the system. A good method is to always lock the main switch on the controller cabinet with a safety lock.
Make sure that no one else can turn on the power to the controller and robot while you are working with the system. A good method is to remove the power cable to the controller.
If the robot is installed at a height, hanging, or other than standing directly on the floor, there may be additional risks than those for a robot standing directly on the floor.
Energy stored in the robot for the purpose of counterbalancing certain axes may be released if the robot, or parts thereof, are dismantled.
Never use the robot as a ladder, which means, do not climb on the controller, motors, or other parts during service work. There is a risk of slipping because of the high temperature of the motors and oil spills that can occur on the robot. There is also a risk of the robot being damaged.
To avoid damaging the product, make sure that there are no loose screws, turnings, or other parts inside the product after work has been performed.
Safety risks during operational disturbances
Corrective maintenance must only be carried out by qualified personnel who are familiar with the entire installation as well as the special risks associated with its different parts.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
23
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.3.1 Safety risks during installation and service work on robots
Continued
If the working process is interrupted, extra care must be taken due to risks other than those associated with regular operation. Such an interruption may have to be rectified manually.
Spare parts and special equipment
ABB does not supply spare parts and special equipment which have not been tested and approved by ABB. The installation and/or use of such products could negatively affect the structural properties of the robot and as a result of that affect the active or passive safety operation. ABB is not liable for damages caused by the use of non-original spare parts and special equipment. ABB is not liable for damages or injuries caused by unauthorized modifications to the robot.
Connection of external safety devices
Apart from the built-in safety functions, the robot is also supplied with an interface for the connection of external safety devices. An external safety function can interact with other machines and peripheral equipment via this interface. This means that control signals can act on safety signals received from the peripheral equipment as well as from the robot.
Personal protective equipment
Always use suitable personal protective equipment, based on the risk assessment for the installation.
Allergenic material
See
Environmental information on page 337
for specification of allergenic materials in the product, if any.
24
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.3.2 Moving robots are potentially lethal
1.3.2 Moving robots are potentially lethal
Description
Any moving robot is a potentially lethal machine.
When running, the robot may perform unexpected and sometimes irrational movements. Moreover, all movements are performed with great force and may seriously injure any personnel and/or damage any piece of equipment located within the working range of the robot.
Safe handling
1
2
3
Action Note
Before attempting to run the robot, make sure all emergency stop equipment is correctly installed and connected.
Emergency stop equipment such as gates, tread mats, light curtains, etc.
Usually the hold-to-run function is active only in manual full speed mode. To increase safety it is also possible to activate hold-to-run for manual reduced speed with a system parameter.
The hold-to-run function is used in manual mode, not in automatic mode.
How to use the hold-to-run function is described in section How to use the hold-torun function in the Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant .
Make sure no personnel are present within the working range of the robot before pressing the start button.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
25
1 Safety
1.3.3 First test run may cause injury or damage
1.3.3 First test run may cause injury or damage
Description
After installation and performing service activities, there are several safety risks to take into consideration before the first test run.
Safe handling
Use this procedure when performing the first test run after installation, maintenance, or repair.
DANGER
Running the robot without fulfilling the following aspects, may involve a risk of injury and cause severe damage to the robot.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Action
Remove all tools and foreign objects from the robot and its working area.
Verify that the robot is properly secured to its position by all screws, before it is powered up.
Verify that any safety equipment installed to secure the position or restrict the robot motion during service activity is removed.
Verify that the fixture and work piece are well secured, if applicable.
Install all safety equipment properly.
Make sure all personnel are standing at a safe distance from the robot, and is out of its reach behind safety fences, or similar.
If maintenance or repair has been done, pay special attention to the function of the part that was serviced.
Collision risks
CAUTION
When programming the movements of the robot, always identify potential collision risks before the first test run.
26
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.3.4 Work inside the working range of the robot
1.3.4 Work inside the working range of the robot
WARNING
If work must be carried out within the work area of the robot, then the following points must be observed:
• The operating mode selector on the controller must be in the manual mode position to render the three-position enabling device operational and to block operation from a computer link or remote control panel.
• The maximum speed of the robot is limited to 250 mm/s when the operating mode selector is in the position Manual mode with reduced speed . This should be the normal position when entering the working space.
The position Manual mode with full speed (100%) may only be used by trained personnel who are aware of the risks that this entails.
Manual mode with full speed (100%) is not available in USA or Canada.
• Pay attention to the rotating axes of the robot. Keep away from axes to not get entangled with hair or clothing. Also, be aware of any danger that may be caused by rotating tools or other devices mounted on the robot or inside the cell.
• Keep clear of moving parts so that limbs, hands, or fingers do not get trapped or crushed by the robot.
• To prevent anyone else from taking control of the robot, always put a safety lock on the cell door and bring the three-position enabling device with you when entering the working space.
WARNING
NEVER , under any circumstances, stay beneath any of the robot's axes! There is always a risk that the robot will move unexpectedly when robot axes are moved using the three-position enabling device or during other work inside the working range of the robot.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
27
1 Safety
1.3.5 Enabling device and hold-to-run functionality
1.3.5 Enabling device and hold-to-run functionality
Three-position enabling device
The three-position enabling device is a manually operated, constant pressure push-button which, when continuously activated in one position only, allows potentially hazardous functions but does not initiate them. In any other position, hazardous functions are stopped safely.
The three-position enabling device is of a specific type where you must press the push-button only half-way to activate it. In the fully in and fully out positions, operating the robot is impossible.
Note
The three-position enabling device is a push-button located on the teach pendant which, when pressed halfway in, switches the system to MOTORS ON. When the enabling device is released or pushed all the way in, the manipulator switches to the MOTORS OFF state.
To ensure safe use of the teach pendant, the following must be implemented:
• The enabling device must never be rendered inoperational in any way.
• During programming and testing, the enabling device must be released as soon as there is no need for the robot to move.
• Anyone entering the working space of the robot must always hold the teach pendant. This is to prevent anyone else from taking control of the robot without his/her knowledge.
Hold-to-run function
The hold-to-run function allows movement when a button connected to the function is actuated manually and immediately stops any movement when released. The hold-to-run function can only be used in manual mode.
How to operate the hold-to-run function for IRC5 is described in Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant .
28
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.3.6 Risks associated with live electric parts
1.3.6 Risks associated with live electric parts
Voltage related risks, general
Work on the electrical equipment of the robot must be performed by a qualified electrician in accordance with electrical regulations.
Although troubleshooting may, on occasion, need to be carried out while the power supply is turned on, the robot must be turned off (by setting the main switch to
OFF) when repairing faults, disconnecting electric leads, and disconnecting or connecting units.
The main supply to the robot must be connected in such a way that it can be turned off from outside the working space of the robot.
Make sure that no one else can turn on the power to the controller and robot while you are working with the system. A good method is to always lock the main switch on the controller cabinet with a safety lock.
The necessary protection for the electrical equipment and robot during installation, commissioning, and maintenance is guaranteed if the valid regulations are followed.
Voltage related risks, IRC5 controller
A danger of high voltage is associated with, for example, the following parts:
• Be aware of stored electrical energy (DC link, Ultracapacitor bank unit) in the controller.
• Units such as I/O modules, can be supplied with power from an external source.
• The main supply/main switch
• The transformers
• The power unit
• The control power supply (230 VAC)
• The rectifier unit (262/400-480 VAC and 400/700 VDC. Note: capacitors!)
• The drive unit (400/700 VDC)
• The drive system power supply (230 VAC)
• The service outlets (115/230 VAC)
• The customer power supply (230 VAC)
• The power supply unit for additional tools, or special power supply units for the machining process.
• The external voltage connected to the controller remains live even when the robot is disconnected from the mains.
• Additional connections.
Voltage related risks, manipulator
A danger of low voltage is associated with the manipulator in:
• The power supply for the motors (up to 800 VDC).
• The user connections for tools or other parts of the installation (max. 230
VAC).
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
29
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
1 Safety
1.3.6 Risks associated with live electric parts
Continued
Voltage related risks, tools, material handling devices, etc.
Tools, material handling devices, etc., may be live even if the robot system is in the OFF position. Power supply cables which are in motion during the working process may be damaged.
30
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.3.7 The unit is sensitive to ESD
1.3.7 The unit is sensitive to ESD
Description
ESD (electrostatic discharge) is the transfer of electrical static charge between two bodies at different potentials, either through direct contact or through an induced electrical field. When handling parts or their containers, personnel not grounded may potentially transfer high static charges. This discharge may destroy sensitive electronics.
Safe handling
1
2
3
Action Note
Use a wrist strap. The wrist strap button is located inside the controller.
Wrist straps must be tested frequently to ensure that they are not damaged and are operating correctly.
• Product manual - IRC5
• Product manual - IRC5 Panel Mounted
Controller
Use an ESD protective floor mat.
Use a dissipative table mat.
The mat must be grounded through a current-limiting resistor.
The mat should provide a controlled discharge of static voltages and must be grounded.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
31
1 Safety
1.3.8 Hot parts may cause burns
1.3.8 Hot parts may cause burns
Description
During normal operation, many parts become hot. Touching these may cause burns.
There is also a risk of fire if flammable materials are put on hot surfaces.
Safe handling
Always use your hand, at some distance, to feel if heat is radiating from the potentially hot component before actually touching it.
Wait until the potentially hot component has cooled if it is to be removed or handled in any other way.
Do not put anything on hot metal surfaces, e.g. paper or plastic.
32
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.3.9 Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems
1.3.9 Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems
General
Special safety regulations apply to pneumatic and hydraulic systems.
Note
All components that remain pressurized after separating the machine from the power supply must be provided with clearly visible drain facilities and a warning sign that indicates the need for pressure relief before adjustments or performing any maintenance on the robot system.
Residual energy
Residual energy can be present in these systems. After shutdown, particular care must be taken.
The pressure must be released in the complete pneumatic or hydraulic systems before starting to repair them.
Work on hydraulic equipment may only be performed by persons with special knowledge and experience of hydraulics.
All pipes, hoses, and connections have to be inspected regularly for leaks and damage. Damage must be repaired immediately.
Splashed oil may cause injury or fire.
Safe design
Gravity may cause any parts or objects held by these systems to drop.
Dump valves should be used in case of emergency.
Shot bolts should be used to prevent tools, etc., from falling due to gravity.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
33
1 Safety
1.3.10 Brake testing
1.3.10 Brake testing
When to test
During operation, the holding brake of each axis normally wears down. A test can be performed to determine whether the brake can still perform its function.
How to test
The function of the holding brake of each axis motor may be verified as described below:
1 Run each robot axis to a position where the combined weight of the robot arm and any load is maximized (maximum static load).
2 Switch the motor to the MOTORS OFF.
3 Inspect and verify that the axis maintains its position.
If the robot does not change position as the motors are switched off, then the brake function is adequate.
34
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.3.11 Safety risks during handling of batteries
1.3.11 Safety risks during handling of batteries
Description
Under normal conditions of use, the electrode materials and liquid electrolyte in the batteries are not exposed to the outside, provided the battery integrity is maintained and seals remain intact.
There is a risk of exposure only in case of abuse (mechanical, thermal, electrical) which leads to the activation of safety valves and/or the rupture of the battery container. Electrolyte leakage, electrode materials reaction with moisture/water or battery vent/explosion/fire may follow, depending upon the circumstances.
Note
Appropriate disposal regulations must be observed.
Safe handling
Use safety glasses when handling the batteries.
In the event of leakage, wear rubber gloves and chemical apron.
In the event of fire, use self-contained breathing apparatus.
Do not short circuit, recharge, puncture, incinerate, crush, immerse, force discharge or expose to temperatures above the declared operating temperature range of the product. Risk of fire or explosion.
Operating temperatures are listed in
Pre-installation procedure on page 49
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
35
1 Safety
1.3.12 Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease)
1.3.12 Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease)
Description
When handling gearbox lubricants, there is a risk of both personal injury and product damage occurring. The following safety information must be regarded before performing any work with lubricants in the gearboxes.
Note
When handling oil, grease, or other chemical substances the safety information of the manufacturer must be observed.
Note
When aggressive media is handled, an appropriate skin protection must be provided. Gloves and goggles are recommended.
Note
Appropriate disposal regulations must be observed.
Note
Take special care when handling hot lubricants.
Safe handling
Warning Description Elimination/Action
Changing and draining gearbox oil or grease may require handling hot lubricant heated up to
90 °C.
Make sure that protective gear like goggles and gloves are always worn during this activity.
Hot oil or grease
When working with gearbox lubricant there is a risk of an allergic reaction.
Make sure that protective gear like goggles and gloves are always worn.
Allergic reaction
Possible pressure build-up in gearbox
When opening the oil or grease plug, there may be pressure present in the gearbox, causing lubricant to spray from the opening.
Open the plug carefully and keep away from the opening. Do not overfill the gearbox when filling.
Continues on next page
36
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.3.12 Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease)
Continued
Warning
Do not overfill
Description Elimination/Action
Overfilling of gearbox lubricant can lead to internal over-pressure inside the gearbox which in turn may:
• damage seals and gaskets
• completely press out seals and gaskets
• prevent the robot from moving freely.
Make sure not to overfill the gearbox when filling it with oil or grease.
After filling, verify that the level is correct.
Do not mix types of oil
Mixing types of oil may cause severe damage to the gearbox.
When filling gearbox oil, do not mix different types of oil unless specified in the instructions. Always use the type of oil specified by the manufacturer.
Warm oil drains quicker than cold oil.
When changing gearbox oil, first run the robot for a time to heat up the oil.
Heat up the oil
Specified amount depends on drained volume
The specified amount of oil or grease is based on the total volume of the gearbox. When changing the lubricant, the amount refilled may differ from the specified amount, depending on how much has previously been drained from the gearbox.
After filling, verify that the level is correct.
Contaminated oil in gear boxes
When draining the oil make sure that as much oil as possible is drained from the gearbox. The reason for this is to drain as much oil sludge and metal chips as possible from the gearbox.
The magnetic oil plugs will take care of any remaining metal chips.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
37
1 Safety
1.4.1 Safety signals in the manual
1.4 Safety signals and symbols
1.4.1 Safety signals in the manual
Introduction to safety signals
This section specifies all safety signals used in the user manuals. Each signal consists of:
• A caption specifying the danger level (DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION) and the type of danger.
• A brief description of what will happen if the the danger is not eliminated.
• Instruction about how to eliminate danger to simplify doing the work.
Danger levels
The table below defines the captions specifying the danger levels used throughout this manual.
Symbol Designation
DANGER
WARNING
ELECTRICAL
SHOCK
Significance
Warns that an accident will occur if the instructions are not followed, resulting in a serious or fatal injury and/or severe damage to the product. It applies to warnings that apply to danger with, for example, contact with high voltage electrical units, explosion or fire risk, risk of poisonous gases, risk of crushing, impact, fall from height, and so on.
Warns that an accident may occur if the instructions are not followed that can lead to serious injury, possibly fatal, and/or great damage to the product. It applies to warnings that apply to danger with, for example, contact with high voltage electrical units, explosion or fire risk, risk of poisonous gases, risk of crushing, impact, fall from height, etc.
Warns for electrical hazards which could result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION Warns that an accident may occur if the instructions are not followed that can result in injury and/or damage to the product. It also applies to warnings of risks that include burns, eye injury, skin injury, hearing damage, crushing or slipping, tripping, impact, fall from height, etc. Furthermore, it applies to warnings that include function requirements when fitting and removing equipment where there is a risk of damaging the product or causing a breakdown.
ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE (ESD)
Warns for electrostatic hazards which could result in severe damage to the product.
Continues on next page
38
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Symbol Designation
NOTE
1 Safety
1.4.1 Safety signals in the manual
Continued
Significance
Describes important facts and conditions.
TIP Describes where to find additional information or how to do an operation in an easier way.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
39
1 Safety
1.4.2 Safety symbols on product labels
1.4.2 Safety symbols on product labels
Introduction to labels
This section describes safety symbols used on labels (stickers) on the product.
Symbols are used in combinations on the labels, describing each specific warning.
The descriptions in this section are generic, the labels can contain additional information such as values.
Note
The safety and health symbols on the labels on the product must be observed.
Additional safety information given by the system builder or integrator must also be observed.
Types of labels
Both the manipulator and the controller are marked with several safety and information labels, containing important information about the product. The information is useful for all personnel handling the robot, for example during installation, service, or operation.
The safety labels are language independent, they only use graphics. See
Symbols on safety labels on page 40
.
The information labels can contain information in text (English, German, and
French).
Symbols on safety labels
Symbol xx0900000812 xx0900000811
Description
Warning!
Warns that an accident may occur if the instructions are not followed that can lead to serious injury, possibly fatal, and/or great damage to the product. It applies to warnings that apply to danger with, for example, contact with high voltage electrical units, explosion or fire risk, risk of poisonous gases, risk of crushing, impact, fall from height, etc.
Caution!
Warns that an accident may occur if the instructions are not followed that can result in injury and/or damage to the product.
It also applies to warnings of risks that include burns, eye injury, skin injury, hearing damage, crushing or slipping, tripping, impact, fall from height, etc. Furthermore, it applies to warnings that include function requirements when fitting and removing equipment where there is a risk of damaging the product or causing a breakdown.
Prohibition
Used in combinations with other symbols.
xx0900000839
Continues on next page
40
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Symbol xx0900000813
1 Safety
1.4.2 Safety symbols on product labels
Continued
Description
See user documentation
Read user documentation for details.
Which manual to read is defined by the symbol:
• No text: Product manual .
• EPS: Application manual - Electronic Position Switches .
Before disassemble, see product manual xx0900000816
Do not disassemble
Disassembling this part can cause injury.
xx0900000815
Extended rotation
This axis has extended rotation (working area) compared to standard.
xx0900000814 xx0900000808
Brake release
Pressing this button will release the brakes. This means that the robot arm can fall down.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
41
1 Safety
1.4.2 Safety symbols on product labels
Continued
Symbol Description
Tip risk when loosening bolts
The robot can tip over if the bolts are not securely fastened.
xx0900000810 xx1500002402
Crush
Risk of crush injuries.
xx0900000817
Continues on next page
42
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Symbol
1 Safety
1.4.2 Safety symbols on product labels
Continued
Description
Heat
Risk of heat that can cause burns. (Both signs are used) xx0900000818
!
xx1300001087
1 xx0900000819
3
4
5
2
6
Moving robot
The robot can move unexpectedly.
xx1000001141
2
4
3
1 xx1500002616
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
43
1 Safety
1.4.2 Safety symbols on product labels
Continued
Symbol Description
Brake release buttons xx0900000820 xx1000001140 xx0900000821
Lifting bolt
Chain sling with shortener xx1000001242
Lifting of robot xx0900000822
Oil
Can be used in combination with prohibition if oil is not allowed.
xx0900000823
Mechanical stop xx0900000824
Continues on next page
44
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
1 Safety
1.4.2 Safety symbols on product labels
Continued
Description
No mechanical stop
Symbol xx1000001144 xx0900000825
Stored energy
Warns that this part contains stored energy.
Used in combination with Do not disassemble symbol.
Pressure
Warns that this part is pressurized. Usually contains additional text with the pressure level.
xx0900000826
Shut off with handle
Use the power switch on the controller.
xx0900000827
Do not step
Warns that stepping on these parts can cause damage to the parts.
xx1400002648
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
45
This page is intentionally left blank
2 Installation and commissioning
2.1 Introduction
2 Installation and commissioning
2.1 Introduction
General
This chapter contains assembly instructions and information for installing the IRB
6620LX at the working site.
More detailed technical data can be found in the Product specification for the IRB
6620LX, such as:
• Load diagram
• Permitted extra loads (equipment), if any
• Location of extra loads (equipment), if any.
Safety information
Before any installation work is commenced, it is extremely important that all safety information is observed.
There are general safety aspects that must be read through, as well as more specific safety information that describes the danger and safety risks when performing the procedures. Read the chapter
before performing any installation work.
Note
If the IRB 6620LX is connected to power, always make sure that the robot is connected to protective earth before starting any installation work.
For more information see:
• Product manual - IRC5
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
47
2 Installation and commissioning
2.2 Robot transportation precautions
2.2 Robot transportation precautions
General
This section describes ABB approved transportation precautions for ABB robots.
CAUTION
All transportation in or outside the plant, must be carried out according to the method described in this section.
Transportation in any other way can seriously damage the robot. If the robot is incorrectly transported and the instructions are not followed, the robot is not covered by the warranty and ABB will not accept any compensation claim.
Method 1 - recommended method
Transportation according to method 1 is strongly recommended by ABB.
48 xx0800000030
Always follow these instructions when transporting an ABB robot according to method 1:
• Always remove the tool before transportation of the robot.
• Always place the robot in the ABB recommended transport position, described in section
Risk of tipping/stability on page 55 .
• Always read and follow the instructions in section
Pre-installation procedure on page 49
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.1 Pre-installation procedure
2.3 Unpacking
2.3.1 Pre-installation procedure
Introduction
This section is intended for use when unpacking and installing the robot for the first time. It also contains information useful during later re-installation of the robot.
Prerequisites for installation personnel
Installation personnel working with an ABB product must:
• be trained by ABB and have the required knowledge of mechanical and electrical installation/maintenance/repair work
• conform to all national and local codes.
Checking the pre-requisites for installation
1
2
3
Action
Make a visual inspection of the packaging and make sure that nothing is damaged.
Remove the packaging.
Check for any visible transport damage.
Note
Stop unpacking and contact ABB if transport damages are found.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Clean the unit with a lint-free cloth, if necessary.
Make sure that the lifting accessory used (if required) is suitable to handle the weight of the robot as specified in:
If the robot is not installed directly, it must be stored as described in:
Storage conditions, robot on page 52
Make sure that the expected operating environment of the robot conforms to the specifications as described in:
Operating conditions, robot on page 52
Before taking the robot to its installation site, make sure that the site conforms to:
•
Loads on foundation, robot on page 50
•
Protection classes, robot on page 52
•
Requirements, foundation on page 51
Before moving the robot, please observe the stability of the robot:
Risk of tipping/stability on page 55
When these prerequisites are met, the robot can be taken to its installation site as described in section:
On-site installation on page 56
Install required equipment, if any.
•
Signal lamp (option) on page 113
Weight, robot
The table shows the weight of the robot.
Robot model
IRB 6620LX
Weight
610 kg
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
49
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.1 Pre-installation procedure
Continued
Note
The weight does not include tools and other equipment fitted on the robot.
Loads on foundation, robot
The forces specified are forces from the robot acting on the beam. For leg dimensioning, the beam mass needs to be added. The beam mass is specified in
Product specification - Linear Axis .
Torque X
Force y
Y
Force z
Z
Torque Z
Force x
Torque Y
X
Force z
Z xx1000000055
The table shows the various forces and torques working on the robot during different kinds of operation.
Note
These forces and torques are extreme values that are rarely encountered during operation. The values also never reach their maximum at the same time!
Continues on next page
50
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.1 Pre-installation procedure
Continued
WARNING
The robot installation is restricted to the mounting options given in following load table(s).
Side mounted
Force
Force x
Force y
Force z
Torque x
Torque y
Torque z
Endurance load (in operation)
11.5 ±3.5 kN
5.2 kN
5.6 kN
8.3 kNm
14.8 kNm
6.5 kNm
Max. load (emergency stop)
11.5 ±11.3 kN
7.7 kN
13.5 kN
17.8 kNm
29.5 kNm
9 kNm
Suspended
Force
Force x
Force y
Force z
Torque x
Torque y
Torque z
Endurance load (in operation)
4.9 kN
5.2 kN
11.5 ±3.5 kN
8.5 kNm
11.2 kNm
6.1 kNm
Max. load (emergency stop)
13.4 kN
7.7 kN
11.5 ±11.3 kN
18.5 kNm
21.5 kNm
9.1 kNm
Requirements, foundation
The table shows the requirements for the foundation where the weight of the installed robot is included:
Requirement
Flatness of foundation surface
Maximum tilt
Minimum resonance frequency
Value
0.3 mm
Note
Flat foundations give better repeatability of the resolver calibration compared to original settings on delivery from ABB.
The value for levelness aims at the circumstance of the anchoring points in the robot base.
0°
Note
It may affect the manipulator lifetime to have a lower resonance frequency than recommended.
The value is recommended for optimal performance.
Due to foundation stiffness, consider robot mass including equipment.
i
For information about compensating for foundation flexibility, see Application manual - Controller software IRC5 , section Motion Process Mode .
i
The minimum resonance frequency given should be interpreted as the frequency of the robot mass/inertia, robot assumed stiff, when a foundation translational/torsional elasticity is added, i.e., the stiffness of the pedestal where the robot is mounted. The minimum resonance frequency should not be interpreted as the resonance frequency of the building, floor etc. For example, if the equivalent mass of the floor is very high, it will not affect robot movement, even if the frequency is well below the stated 25 Hz. The robot should be mounted as rigid as possibly to the floor.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
51
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.1 Pre-installation procedure
Continued
Disturbances from other machinery will affect the robot and the tool accuracy. The robot has resonance frequencies in the region 10 – 20 Hz and disturbances in this region will be amplified, although somewhat damped by the servo control. This might be a problem, depending on the requirements from the applications. If this is a problem, the robot needs to be isolated from the environment.
Storage conditions, robot
The table shows the allowed storage conditions for the robot:
Parameter
Minimum ambient temperature
Maximum ambient temperature
Maximum ambient temperature (less than 24 hrs)
Maximum ambient humidity
Value
-25° C
+55° C
+70° C
95% at constant temperature
(gaseous only)
Operating conditions, robot
The table shows the allowed operating conditions for the robot: i
Parameter
Minimum ambient temperature
Maximum ambient temperature
Maximum ambient humidity
Value
+5° C i
+50° C
Max. 95% at constant temperature
At low environmental temperature (< 10° C) a warm-up phase is recommended to be run with the robot, as with any other machine. Otherwise there is a risk that the robot stops or run with lower performance due to temperature dependent oil- and grease viscosity.
Protection classes, robot
The table shows the available protection types of the robot, with the corresponding protection class.
Protection type
Manipulator, protection type Standard
Manipulator, protection type Foundry Plus
Protection class
IP 54
IP 67
52
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.2 Working range and type of motion
2.3.2 Working range and type of motion
Type of Motion - IRB 6620LX-150/1.9
1
2
3
4
Axis Type of motion
Travel length, Linear Axis
Arm motion
Arm motion
Wrist motion
Range of movement
IRB 6620LX-150/1.9
1.8 to 33 m
+ 125° to - 125°
+ 70° to - 180°
+ 300° to - 300° i
5
6
Bend motion
Turn motion
+ 130° to - 130°
+ 300° to - 300° default
Max. ± 96 Revolutions i
The default working range for axis 6 can be extended by changing parameter values in the software.
Option 610-1 “Independent axis” can be used for resetting the revolution counter after the axis has been rotated (no need for “rewinding” the axis).
IRB6620LX-150/1.9
Robot Type
IRB 6620LX-150/1.9
Handling capacity (kg)
150
Reach (m)
2.2
xx0900000787
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
53
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.2 Working range and type of motion
Continued xx0900000786
54
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.3.3 Risk of tipping/stability
2.3.3 Risk of tipping/stability
Risk of tipping
If the robot is not fastened to the foundation while moving the arm, the robot is not stable in the whole working area. Moving the arm will displace the center of gravity, which may cause the robot to tip over.
The shipping position is the most stable position.
Do not change the robot position before securing it to the foundation!
Shipping and transportation position
This figure shows the robot in its shipping position and transportation position.
xx0900000167
WARNING
The robot is likely to be mechanically unstable if not secured to the foundation.
55 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.1 Frame configurations
2.4 On-site installation
2.4.1 Frame configurations
Transportation and unpacking
The machine parts are treated with rust protection oil (spray) and packed in oiled paper. Carefully remove the packing.
Note
The rust protection oil serves as protection for the machine parts. Do not remove the oil.
Configurations
Two configurations are used for the IRB6620LX.
xx0900000226
A
B
Frame configuration for inverted mounting
Frame configuration for side assembly
Continues on next page
56
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Sections
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.1 Frame configurations
Continued
The track is divided into sections, each section having a maximum length of twelve
(12) meters. Each section has to be supported by one or two stands.
xx0900000231
A
B
Section (12 m)
Section (12 m)
Sections at delivery
At delivery the IRB 6620LX is divided in sections. The sections and their weight are described in the figure below. In this figure the sections are 12 m.
xx0900000275
A Lower leg sections (lifting weight aprox. 1300 kg)
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
57
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.1 Frame configurations
Continued
B
C
Upper leg sections with carriage track (lifting weight approx. 5,000 kg) (valid for
12 m)
Upper leg sections with carriage track and carriage (lifting weight approx. 5,400 kg) (12 m)
IRB 6620LX manipulator (lifting weight approx. 600 kg) D
Sections to assembly
For assembly information see:
• Section A to B and A to C described in
Assembling the frame supports on page 62
.
• Section B to C described in
.
58
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.2 Lifting and securing the frame
2.4.2 Lifting and securing the frame
Section overview
This section is divided into:
•
Lifting the frame support on page 60
•
•
Securing the frame support on page 64
•
Securing the frame support (welded) on page 65
At delivery the IRB 6620LX is divided into two sections. The sections and their weights are described in
Frame configurations on page 56 . The assembly of the
IRB6620LX is therefore divided into sections. The figure below explains the mounting sequence.
7
8 xx0900000334
1
2
3
4
5
6
Lift the frame supports 1- 4 and place them in an approximate position.
Lift frame 5 and place it on top of frame supports 1 and 2.
Assemble all bolts and nuts 6-7 and tighten them.
Lift frame 8 and place it on top of frame supports 3 and 4.
Assemble all bolts and nuts 9-10 and tighten them.
Join the two tracks 11 and tighten the assembly see section
Joining two frame tracks on page 66
. (more then 12m).
Secure the frame supports to the floor 12.
Assemble the robot arm system 13 (axis 2-6).
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
59
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.2 Lifting and securing the frame
Continued
Lifting the frame support xx0900000225
CAUTION
The support frame weighs 1300 kg, all lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly.
Continues on next page
60
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Lifting the frame
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.2 Lifting and securing the frame
Continued
Action
1
WARNING
Personnel must not, under any circumstances, be present under the suspended load!
Information xx0900000224
C
D
A
B
E
Lifting hook
Lifting slings
Lifting assistance
Screw
Lifting protection
DANGER
Always use lifting protective plates against sharp corners.
CAUTION
The support frame weigh, up to 5400 kg, all lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
61
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.2 Lifting and securing the frame
Continued
1
2
Action
Put on the lifting belts in accordance with sketch
Use lifting protective plates against sharp corners
Note
Assembling the frame supports xx0900000233
A
B
Nut M24
Screw M24 x 70 with washer
Tightening torque: 725 Nm
Continues on next page
62
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.2 Lifting and securing the frame
Continued xx0900000229
A
B
C
D
Frame
Distance plate
Spacer
Frame support
1
2
Action Note
Assemble the frame support using the eight M24 screw.
Tightening torque 725 Nm
Assemble the frame support to the frame using the sixteen M24 x 120 screws (use the distance plates).
Tightening torque 725 Nm
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
63
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.2 Lifting and securing the frame
Continued
Securing the frame support xx0900000228
A
B
C
D
Ground levelling screw
Support/framework
Anchor bolt
Chemical anchor cartridge m (anchor bolt size) d (drill size) mm h (drill depth) mm
Tightening torque (Nm)
M30
Ø35
270
300
1
2
3
Action
Use the ground levelling screw to adjust the height of each frame support. Use a water leveler to get the frame horizontal.
Drill holes for the anchor bolts, use drills according to the table above.
Assemble the anchor bolts according to the manufacturer instructions.
Information
Continues on next page
64
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Securing the frame support (welded)
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.2 Lifting and securing the frame
Continued m k n h
A
D
E
B
C
F xx0900000272
C
D
A
B
E
F
Screw
Ground levelling screw
Support/framework
Weld nut
Plate
Anchor bolt M20
(m) Ground levelling screw
(k) Fillet weld thickness (mm)
(n) Seam length (mm)
1
2
3
Anchor bolt size d (drill size) mm h (drill depth) mm
Tightening torque (Nm)
4
M56x3 a 5
330
M20
Ø24
170
160
Action
Drill holes for the anchor bolts and fasten the plate to the floor.
Assemble and fasten the anchor bolts according to the manufacturer instructions.
Use the ground levelling screw to adjust the height of each frame support. Use a water leveler to get the frame horizontal.
When the support stands are positioned, weld the weld nuts according to the table above.
65 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.3 Joining two frame tracks
2.4.3 Joining two frame tracks
Required equipment
Equipment
Standard tools
Joining frames
Art.no
Note
xx0900000230
D
E
F
A
B
C
Track bar 1
Track bar 2
Washer
Distance plate
Centering bolt
Screws M20 x 105
Tightening torque: 600 Nm
1
Action
Move two sections together.
Note
Continues on next page
66 xx0900000349
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2
Action
Adjust the height using the leveling screws.
• A: Screw
• B: Adjustment screw
• C: Locking nut
• D: Weld
Note
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.3 Joining two frame tracks
Continued xx0900000355
3 Fix the frames using the two centering bolts and the twelve attachment screws.
Tightening torque 600 Nm.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
67
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.3 Joining two frame tracks
Continued
Mounting rails and guides xx0900000345
D
E
F
A
B
C
Gauge
Clamp
Racks
Torque wrench
Reference areas
Guide
1
Action
Use a gauge (B) to adjust the gear racks (A).
Note
2 Tighten the gear racks.
xx0900000362
Tightening torque 83 Nm
Continues on next page
68
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.3 Joining two frame tracks
Continued
3
Action
Measure the distance X and Y:
Desired value:
X = Y ±0.02mm
Note xx0900000346
• A: Guidance transition
• B: Measurement tool
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
69
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.4 Lifting robot with fork lift accessory
2.4.4 Lifting robot with fork lift accessory
General
The robot may be moved using a fork lift, provided that available special aids are used.
This section describes how to attach the fork lift equipment to the robot.
Fork lift device set
The fork lift device accessory is fitted to the robot as shown in the figure.
xx0900000168
C
D
A
B
Lifting and turning tool 3HAC034648-001
Fork lift pocket
2x screw M12x30
2x screw M12x20
Continues on next page
70
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.4 Lifting robot with fork lift accessory
Continued
Required equipment
Equipment
Fork lift device accessory
Turning tool
Standard toolkit
Art. no.
Note
-
3HAC034648-001
Content is defined in section
Shipping position
The illustration shows the position of the robot when lifting it with a fork lift.
xx0900000169
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
71
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.4 Lifting robot with fork lift accessory
Continued
Lifting the robot with fork lift
This procedure details how to secure the fork lift set in order to lift the robot and move it using fork lift ONLY!
1
Action Note
Move robot to its shipping position!
Shown in figure
.
Note
Release the brakes if required as detailed in the section
Manually releasing the brakes on page 95 .
No load is permitted on the robot!
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
3 Fit the turning tool 3HAC034648-
001.
4 Insert fork lift forks into the pockets.
5
CAUTION
Lifting the robot with fork lift shall only be done with all four fork lift pockets fitted! If lifting with fewer than four fork lift pockets fitted, there is a risk of accidents happen!
xx0900000170
• A: Turning tool 3HAC034648-001
• B: 2x screw M12x20
• C: 2x screw M12x30
Continues on next page
72 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Action
6
CAUTION
The IRB 6620LX robot weighs 610 kg.
All lifting accessories used must be sized accordingly!
7 Carefully lift the robot and move it to its installation site.
Note
Note
Move the robot with low speed!
8
WARNING
Personnel must not, under any circumstances, be present under the suspended load!
9 For more information see the section
Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool on page 74
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.4 Lifting robot with fork lift accessory
Continued
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
73
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
The lifting and turning tool
The lifting and turning tool 3HAC034648-001 is used for lifting and turning of the
IRB 6620LX.
A
D
C
B xx0900000243
A
B
C
D
Upper lifting beam
Lower lifting beam
Locking screws
Lifting eye
Continues on next page
74
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Installation procedure
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued xx0900000253
A
B
C
D
E
Lifting eye
Lifting and turning tool 3HAC034648-001
Chain block for minimum lifting weight 500 kg, chain length minimum 3 m
Attachment holes in the robot foot
IRB 6620LX shipment pallet
CAUTION
The IRB 6620LX shipment pallet is prepared for this specific use and is not a standard pallet., do not use a standard pallet as a transportation or storage stand for the robot.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
75
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
Note
Keep the shipment pallet for later storage of the IRB 6620LX .
1
Action
Use a fork lift to transport the IRB 6620LX to the mounting site.
Note
CAUTION
The lifting weight is 640 kg
2 Fit the lifting and turning tool 3HAC034648-001 according to the figure.
3
4 xx0900000170
• A: Lifting and turning tool 3HAC034648-001
• B: 2x screw M12x20
• C: 2x screw M12x30
Attach a overhead crane to the upper lifting beam.
Attach a chain block and a lifting eye in the robot upper arm.
Note
Use a suitable chain block for minimum lifting weight 500 kg and with chain length minimum 3 m.
5
6
Tighten the chain block.
Lift the robot.
Continues on next page
76
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
7
Action
Release the tension on the chain block until the robot is balanced.
Note
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
8 Fit a lifting eye in the robot foot.
xx0900000250 xx0900000254
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
77
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
9
Action
Lift the robot to a suspended position.
Note
10 Use the forklift to lift the robot.
CAUTION
Always use the locking screws on the lifting tool shown in figure in the section
Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool on page 74 .
xx0900000248 xx0900000244
Continues on next page
78
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
11
Action
Assemble the cable harness to the robot foot using the base flange.
Fit:
• A: 2x M6 Screws
• B: Base flange
Note
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
12 Strap the cables to the base flange.
xx0900000373
13 Remove:
• A: Grease reservoir
• B: Motor cover
Fit:
• C: Guide sleeves xx0900000374 xx0900000267
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
79
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
14
Action Note
Use the fork lift to lift the robot and the guide sleeves to get the robot in position.
CAUTION
There should be a 10 mm gap between the robot foot and the carriage, do not lift the whole way, there is a great risk of damaging the bearings in the carriage .
15 Fit the six (6) attachment screws (A).
xx0900000188
16
17
Close the 10 mm gap using the six (6) attachment screws and tighten them.
Tightening torque 725 Nm
Do the electrical connections (R1.MP/R1.SMB) as in figure A.
Then follow the connections as (R1.MP1and
R1.FB1) in figure B.
Fit the cover on the back of the axis-1 motor.
Fit the cable gland.
Fit the connection plate C for the connectors
R1.MP/R1.SMB onto the carriage.
18 Calibrate the robot.
xx0900000245
Described in the section
Checking the synchronization position on page 335 .
Continues on next page
80
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
Dismantle procedure suspended
1
2
Action
Jog the robot axis to a position suitable for dismantling and mounting the turning tool.
Open the clamps (A) holding the lower arm cable harness.
Information
CAUTION
It is possible to damage the cable harness depending on from which side the forklift is used.
A
3 Use a forklift for easier mounting of the lifting and turning tool.
xx0900000246 xx0900000244
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
81
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
4
Action
Mount the lifting and turning tool as in the figure.
Information
5 Jog the robot into lifting position.
xx0900000179
• A: Lifting beam lower
• B: Screws 2x M12x20
• C: Screws 2x M12x30 xx0900000169
Continues on next page
82
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
Action
6
DANGER
Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies before entering the workspace of the manipulator.
Also read the safety sections:
•
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems on page 33
•
Risks associated with live electric parts on page 29
•
Safety risks during installation and service work on robots on page 23
7 Disconnect the electrical connections
(R1.MP/R1.SMB) A in figure.
Dismount the cover on the back of the motor axis 1 and disconnect
(R1.MP1and R1.FB1) B in figure.
Dismount the cable gland.
Dismount the connection plate C for the connectors
R1.MP/R1.SMB from the carriage.
Information xx0900000245
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
83
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
8
Action
Loosen the six (6) attachment screws (A) until you see a gap between the robot and the carriage.
Information
9 Lift the robot with the fork lift to release the pressure on the attachment screws.
10
CAUTION
The lifting weight is 640 kg.
11 Remove the six (6) attachment screws.
12
WARNING
Personnel must not, under any circumstances, be present under the suspended load!
xx0900000188
CAUTION
This step is essential to prevent the forklift from damaging the carriage bearings.
Dismantle procedure 90°
1
Action
Jog the robot axis to a position suitable for dismantling and mounting the turning tool.
Information
Continues on next page
84
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
2
Action
Mount the lifting and turning tool as in the figure.
Information
3 Jog the robot into lifting position.
xx0900000179
• A: Lifting beam lower
• B: Screws 2x M12x20
• C: Screws 2x M12x30 xx0900000382
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
85
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
Action
4
DANGER
Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies before entering the workspace of the manipulator.
Also read the safety sections:
•
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems on page 33
•
Risks associated with live electric parts on page 29
•
Safety risks during installation and service work on robots on page 23
5 Disconnect the electrical connections
(R1.MP/R1.SMB) A in figure.
Dismount the cover on the back of the motor axis 1 and disconnect
(R1.MP1and R1.FB1) B in figure.
Dismount the cable gland.
Dismount the connection plate C for the connectors
R1.MP/R1.SMB from the carriage.
Information xx0900000245
6 Loosen the six (6) attachment screws (A) until you see a gap between the robot and the carriage.
CAUTION
This step is essential to prevent the overhead crane from damaging the carriage bearings.
Continues on next page
86
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
7
Action
Lift the robot using the overhead crane until you close the gap.
Information
8
CAUTION
The lifting weight is 640 kg+tool.
9 Remove the six (6) attachment screws.
10
WARNING
Personnel must not, under any circumstances, be present under the suspended load!
xx0900000383
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
87
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
11
Action
Use the chain blocks to lower the robot until it is possible to use the forklift, or using a second chain block.
Information xx0900000430
Continues on next page
88
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
12
Action
Use the second chain block to lower the robot completely.
Information xx0900000432
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
89
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
Turning procedure
Fitting the lifting and turning tool
The figure shows the lifting and turning tool fitted to the robot.
xx0900000247
A
B
C
D
Chain block for minimum lifting weight 500 kg, chain length minimum 3 m
Lifting eye
Lifting beam upper
Lifting chains
Turning the robot
1
Action
Attach the upper beam to the lower beam using the lifting chains.
Information
Continues on next page
90
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
2
Action
Attach the chain block to the upper beam lifting eye.
Information
Note
Use a suitable chain block for minimum lifting weight
500 kg and with chain length minimum 3 m.
3 Fit a lifting eye in the robot foot attachment hole and attach the chain block.
4
5
6
Loosen the fork locking screws.
Use the chain block to lift and balance the robot.
Remove the straps from the cables on the base flange.
xx0900000254 xx0900000374
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
91
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
7
Action
Remove the base flange from the robot foot.
Fit:
• A: 2x M6 Screws
• B: Base flange
Information
8
9
Remove the forks.
Release the pressure on the chain block.
xx0900000373
10
11
When the pressure is gone remove the chain block from the robot foot.
Remove the lifting eye.
xx0900000248
Continues on next page
92
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
12
Action
Fit a lifting eye in the robot upper arm.
Information xx0900000250
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
93
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.5 Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool
Continued
13
Action
Lift the robot using the chain block until the robot foot is horizontal.
Information
14 Fit the robot onto the shipment pallet.
xx0900000251
94 xx0900000252
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.6 Manually releasing the brakes
2.4.6 Manually releasing the brakes
General
This section details how to release the holding brakes of each axis motor.
Location of brake release unit
The internal brake release unit is located as shown in the figure.
Brake release at base
The figure below shows the unit located at the base.
xx0900000142
A Internal brake release unit with push buttons
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
95
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.6 Manually releasing the brakes
Continued
Brake release at frame
The figure below shows the unit located at the frame.
xx0200000376
Internal brake release unit with push buttons, located on the robot frame
Releasing the brakes
This procedure details how to release the holding brakes when the robot is equipped with an internal brake release unit.
1
Action Note
The internal brake release unit is equipped with buttons for controlling the axes brakes.
The buttons are numbered according to the numbers of the axes.
If the robot is not connected to the controller, power must be supplied to the connector R1.MP according to the section
Supplying power to connector R1.MP on page 97 .
Buttons are shown in figure
Location of brake release unit on page 95 .
2
DANGER
When releasing the holding brakes, the robot axes may move very quickly and sometimes in unexpected ways!
Make sure no personnel is near or beneath the robot arm!
3 Release the holding brake on a particular robot axis by pressing the corresponding button on the internal brake release unit.
The brake will function again as soon as the button is released.
Continues on next page
96
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.6 Manually releasing the brakes
Continued
Supplying power to connector R1.MP
If the robot is not connected to the controller, power must be supplied to connector
R1.MP on the robot in order to enable the brake release buttons.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Incorrect connections, such as supplying power to the wrong pin, may cause all brakes to be released simultaneously!
2 Supply 0V on pin 12 and 24V on pin 11.
xx0600002937
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
97
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.7 Orienting and securing the robot
2.4.7 Orienting and securing the robot
General
This section details how to orient and secure the robot in order to run the robot safely.
Illustration, robot fitted to base plate
This illustration shows the robot base fitted to the carriage.
xx0900000171
A
B
C
6x Screw M24x100
6x Washer
2x Guide sleeve
Attachment screws
The table below specifies the type of securing screws and washers to be used for securing the robot to the base plate/foundation.
Suitable screws, lightly lubricated:
Quality:
Suitable washer:
Tightening torque:
M24 x 100
Quality 8.8
Thickness: 4 mm
Outer diameter: 44 mm
Inner diameter: 25 mm
725 Nm
Continues on next page
98
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.7 Orienting and securing the robot
Continued
Hole configuration, base
This illustration shows the hole configuration used when securing the robot.
xx0900000172
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
99
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.8 Setting the system parameters for a suspended or tilted robot
2.4.8 Setting the system parameters for a suspended or tilted robot
General
The robot is configured for mounting parallel to the floor, without tilting, on delivery.
The method for mounting the robot in a suspended (upside down) or tilted position is basically the same as for floor mounting, but the system parameters that describe the mounting angle (how the robot is oriented relative to the gravity) must be re-defined.
Note
With suspended installation, make sure that the gantry or corresponding structure is rigid enough to prevent unacceptable vibrations and deflections, so that optimum performance can be achieved.
Note
The allowed mounting positions are described in the product specification for the robot. The requirements on the foundation are described in
Requirements, foundation on page 51
.
System parameters
Note
The mounting angle must be configured correctly in the system parameters so that the robot system can control the movements in the best possible way. An incorrect definition of the mounting angle will result in:
• Overloading the mechanical structure.
• Lower path performance and path accuracy.
• Some functions will not work properly, for example Load Identification and
Collision detection .
Gravity Alpha
If the robot is mounted on a wall (rotated around the x-axis), then the robot base frame and the system parameter Gravity Alpha must be redefined. The value of
Gravity Alpha should then be ±π/2 (±1.570796).
Continues on next page
100
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.8 Setting the system parameters for a suspended or tilted robot
Continued
The Gravity Alpha is a positive rotation direction around the x-axis in the base coordinate system. The value is set in radians.
Note
The system parameter Gravity Alpha is not supported for all robot types. It is not supported for IRB 140, IRB 1410, IRB 1600ID, IRB 2400, IRB 4400, IRB 6400R,
IRB 6400 (except for IRB 6400 200/2.5 and IRB 6400 200/2.8), IRB 6600, IRB
6650, IRB 6650S and IRB 7600 (except for IRB 7600 325/3.1).
If the robot does not support Gravity Alpha , then use Gravity Beta along with the recalibration of axis 1 to define the rotation of the robot around the x-axis.
Note
The parameter is supported for all robots on track when the system parameter
7 axes high performance motion is set, see Technical reference manual - System parameters .
Gamma Rotation
Gamma Rotation defines the orientation of the robot foot on the travel carriage
(track motion).
Mounting angles and values
The following values are applicable for the IRB 6620LX.
Position of the robot
Suspended
Wall
Gravity Alpha
+3.141592
+1.570796
Gamma Rotation
-1.570796
-1.570796
Defining the parameter in the IRC5 software
The value of the system parameters that define the mounting angle must be redefined when changing the mounting angle of the robot. The parameters belong to the type Robot , in the topic Motion .
The system parameters are described in Technical reference manual - System parameters .
The system parameters are redefined in the Configuration Editor , in RobotStudio or on the FlexPendant.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
101
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.9 Fitting equipment on robot
2.4.9 Fitting equipment on robot
General
The robot features mounting holes for additional equipment.
Access to any of the following mounting holes may be obstructed by any additional cabling, equipment, etc., fitted by the robot user. Make sure the required mounting holes are accessible when planning the robot cell.
Note
All equipment and cables used on the robot, must be designed and fitted not to damage the robot and/or its parts.
Continues on next page
102
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.9 Fitting equipment on robot
Continued
Illustration, fitting of extra equipment on upper arm
The illustration below shows the mounting holes available for fitting extra equipment on the upper arm.
xx0600002941
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
103
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.9 Fitting equipment on robot
Continued xx0600002945
Fastener quality
When fitting tools on the turning disk (see the figures above), only use screws with quality 12.9.
Standard screws with quality 8.8 may be used when fitting other equipment to the mounting holes.
104
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.10 Installing the guide trough
2.4.10 Installing the guide trough
Documentation
For more information, see Transport and startup - E-chainsystems (IGUS) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) or visit the homepage
( www.gudel.com
).
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
105
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.11 Lifting and fitting the cable chain IGUS
2.4.11 Lifting and fitting the cable chain IGUS
Illustration, cable chain and cable tray made of aluminium profiles
The figure shows the cable chain IGUS and the cable tray designed for the cable chain.
xx1500000868
Plan the job
Cable chains are easily damaged through improper handling. Chains longer than
4 meters are heavy and cumbersome to move. In order to prevent personal injury and damage to the chain please pay attention while handling.
Read the procedure through closely before installing the chain and plan the job in advance, in regard to the actual installation site.
To move the chain from storage to track, use one of the methods described in this section. Method 2 requires an overhead crane.
Required equipment
Equipment
Lifting slings, standard -
Art. no.
Note
Quantity depends on track motion length.
Required if using lifting method 1.
Required if using lifting method 2.
Lifting sling, extra wide (50 mm) -
Overhead crane -
Method 1: lifting the cable chain that is folded in half
Action
1
CAUTION
The complete cable chain weighs 8 - 15 kg / meter
(depending on content). All lifting accessories used must be sized accordingly!
Note
Continues on next page
106
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.11 Lifting and fitting the cable chain IGUS
Continued
2
3
4
Action
Place the chain so that it is folded in half lying flat.
Place lifting slings on the two ends and in the middle.
If the folded chain is longer than 4 meters then extra lifting slings should be placed so that the chain is supported every two meters.
Note xx1300000887
Lift the cable chain to the installation position above the cable tray. The chain should be placed so that both ends are in the middle of the track, at the aluminium profile that has a cut-out.
xx1300000932
5 There is no space for the lifting slings to stay fitted to the chain once it is lowered into the tray, therefore these must be removed before the cable chain is placed inside the tray.
Lower the fixed and movable ends first, then continue lowering bit by bit until the complete chain is fitted into the tray, while at the same time removing the lifting slings one by one.
Method 2: lifting the cable chain that is rolled
This procedure requires an overhead crane.
Action
1
CAUTION
The complete cable chain weighs 8 - 15 kg / meter
(depending on content). All lifting accessories used must be sized accordingly!
Note
2 With the chain lying on its side, secure the loose end to ensure that the chain can not unroll during the lift.
xx1300000888
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
107
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.11 Lifting and fitting the cable chain IGUS
Continued
3
4
Action
Lift the chain so that it is standing upright and insert a wide lifting sling (50 mm) through the center of the chain.
Lift the cable chain to the installation position above the cable tray. The chain should be placed so that both ends are in the middle of the track, at the aluminium profile that has a cut-out.
Note
5
6
Lower the cable chain into the cable tray. The ends of the chain should be in the middle of the track.
In order to keep the correct length for long chains that are to be rolled, the strapping plate as well as the first cover and clips are removed. Refit these parts during installation.
xx1300000889 xx1300000890
Installing the cable chain into the tray
How to install the cable chain into the tray is described in
Refitting the energy chain on page 293 .
For more information, see Installation guide - Gliding applications (IGUS) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) or visit the homepage ( www.gudel.com
).
108
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.12 Inspecting and test running the e-chain before start-up
2.4.12 Inspecting and test running the e-chain before start-up
Inspection before test run
There are several inspection points of the e-chainsystem
® prior to start-up. These are detailed in Transport and startup - E-chainsystems (IGUS) . Please read them through before start-up of the e-chain
®
.
Test run
Test run the e-chainsystem
® at low speed, slowly increasing the speed, run to each end position:
• Check for sufficient e-chain
® length: e-chain
® must not be under mechanical stress or taught.
• Check complete e-chainsystem
® edges.
is free from foreign objects or interfering
For more information, see Transport and startup - E-chainsystems (IGUS) at myABB
Business Portal, www.myportal.abb.com, or visit the homepage, www.gudel.com.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
109
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.13 Loads fitted to the robot, stopping time and braking distances
2.4.13 Loads fitted to the robot, stopping time and braking distances
General
Any loads mounted on the robot must be defined correctly and carefully (with regard to the position of center of gravity and mass moments of inertia) in order to avoid jolting movements and overloading motors, gears and structure.
CAUTION
Incorrectly defined loads may result in operational stops or major damage to the robot.
References
Load diagrams, permitted extra loads (equipment) and their positions are specified in the product specification. The loads must be defined in the software.
• Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant
Stopping time and braking distances
The performance of the motor brake depends on if there are any loads attached to the robot. For more information, see product specification for the robot.
110
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.14 Optimizing the performance
2.4.14 Optimizing the performance
Standard performance
The standard performance of a linear axis system should be more than enough for most material handling applications. However if the application requires higher accuracy, or if the installation is at the "weaker end" there are a number of possibilities to improve the performance. Factors affecting the performance are for example: height of the legs, position of the legs, length of the movement, speed, robot arm position, tool design, and floor stiffness.
CAUTION
If two IRB 6620LX are mounted on the same linear axis, then they may influence each other causing vibrations. Therefore, is the securing of the frame support extra important for applications where even small vibrations can cause disturbances.
How to improve performance
Improve the stability of the installation
The most important factor is the configuration of the legs. Installations with long distance between the legs in combination with high legs are more unstable. The floor stability and attachment of the lower legs are also important factors. The performance will in general be better when the robot is at a position close to a leg.
See Product specification - IRB 6620 , and Product specification - Linear Axis .
Reduce the acceleration
The instruction AccSet can be used in the RAPID program to temporarily reduce the acceleration and thus vibration of the system. This is especially efficient during shorter movements.
For example, AccSet 50, 25 will limit the acceleration to 50% of the normal value and the ramp (acceleration rate) to 25% of the normal value.
Use reduced acceleration during the more sensitive movements and increase the value to the default ( AccSet 100, 100 ) during longer movements or when the need of accuracy is less important.
For more information about AccSet see Technical reference manual - RAPID
Instructions, Functions and Data types .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
111
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.14 Optimizing the performance
Continued
Optimize the servo control
The argument Type in the instruction TuneServo can be defined as TUNE_DF to improve the accuracy, by damping oscillations of the axes due to mechanical resonances.
TUNE_DF can be adjusted within the RAPID program during execution.
This means that you can have different settings for
TuneServo for different robot positions and movements. Adjusting TUNE_DF correctly will not affect the cycle time and path accuracy in any negative way.
Tip
The ABB software TuneMaster is a good tool for finding the optimal value of
TUNE_DF .
TuneMaster is included in the RobotWare distribution.
The argument Type in the instruction TuneServo can be defined as TUNE_DH to improve the smoothness of the robot path, by decreasing the effective bandwidth.
Using TUNE_DH affects the path in corner zones, increasing the cycle time in fine points but not along the entire path.
For more information about TuneServo see Technical reference manual - RAPID
Instructions, Functions and Data types .
112
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.15 Signal lamp (option)
2.4.15 Signal lamp (option)
Description
A signal lamp with a yellow fixed light can be mounted on the robot, as a safety device.
Installation
See the assembly instruction delivered with the signal lamp.
Function
The lamp is active in MOTORS ON mode.
Further information
Further information about the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF mode may be found in the product manual for the controller.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
113
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.16 Automatic lubrication system
2.4.16 Automatic lubrication system
Power source for the lubrication system
The lubrication system for the linear axis is powered either by battery or by cable from external power source, depending of which option is chosen at delivery. IRC5 can control the lubrication if option 1070-1 for IRC5 is selected. Read more in
Product manual - IRC5 .
Handling the signal from the grease level sensor
The grease level sensor reports a completed cycle of the progressive distributor by changing the pulse twice. The software has to react on the second change of pulse.
The sensor can be connected either to the robot controller or to a PLC. Code must be written to handle the signal.
Setting up the lubrication interval
The general recommendation is to start with a time interval of 150 hours or a length interval of 100 km for the lubrication. These values are to be used for normal room conditions regarding temperature, humidity and dust. If the conditions are more severe, shorter intervals should be used.
The flat rails and rack should be “wet” and have a thin oil film but not be soaked.
If the lubrication is correctly adjusted a few floor drips may occur but not much more.
Continues on next page
114
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
2 Installation and commissioning
2.4.16 Automatic lubrication system
Continued
Activating the lubrication and detecting lubrication errors
The recommendation is to send 5 pulses (10s) to the lubrication pump every 5 min or until the sensor responds. The sensor response at a successful lubrication is to change the output value twice. The initial output value can be either 0 or 1. This gives two scenarios for a completed sensor feedback: 0-1-0 or 1-0-1. In other words, a correct sensor feedback after a completed lubrication cycle will be that the sensor is changing the output value twice.
If no response has been received from the sensor after 5 pulses and 25 min, an error has occurred.
(1)
10sek
A:
B:
(0) 5min 10min 15min 20min 25min 30min
(2)
(0)
(1)
(2)
A
B
A:
B: xx1200001040
(0) 5min
Start
Normal case
Error occured
Motor signal
Sensor signal
10min 15min 20min 25min 30min
Further information
System functions, mechanical connection, signal diagram, function description, maintenance, information about programming and setting up for operation is described in System manual - Automatic lubrication system (Güdel) .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
115
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.1 Robot cabling and connection points
2.5 Electrical connections
2.5.1 Robot cabling and connection points
Introduction
Connect the robot and controller to each other after securing them to the foundation.
The lists below specify which cables to use for each respective application.
Main cable categories
All cables between the robot and controller are divided into the following categories:
Cable category
Robot cables
Customer cables (option)
Description
Handles power supply to and control of the robot's motors as well as feedback from the serial measurement board.
Specified in the table
Handles communication with equipment fitted on the robot by the customer, low voltage signals and high voltage power supply + protective ground.
The customer cables also handle databus communication.
See the product manual for the controller, see document number in
Robot cables
These cables are included in the standard delivery. They are completely pre-manufactured and ready to plug in.
Cable sub-category
Robot cable, power
Robot cable, signals
Description Connection point, cabinet
Transfers drive power from the drive units in the control cabinet to the robot motors.
XS1
Transfers resolver data from and power supply to the serial measurement board.
XS2
Connection point, robot
R1.MP
R1.SMB
Robot cable, power
Cable
Robot cable, power: 7 m
Robot cable, power: 15 m
Robot cable, power: 22 m
Robot cable, power: 30 m
Robot cable, signals
Cable
Robot cable signal, shielded: 7 m
Robot cable signal, shielded: 15 m
Robot cable signal, shielded: 22 m
Robot cable signal, shielded: 30 m
Continues on next page
116
Art. no.
3HAC026787-001
3HAC026787-002
3HAC026787-003
3HAC026787-004
Art. no.
3HAC7998-1
3HAC7998-2
3HAC7998-3
3HAC7998-4
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
2 Installation and commissioning
2.5.1 Robot cabling and connection points
Continued
Bending radius for static floor cables
The minimum bending radius is 10 times the cable diameter for static floor cables.
A
B xx1600002016
A
B
Diameter
Diameter x10
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
117
2 Installation and commissioning
2.6 Start of robot in cold environments
2.6 Start of robot in cold environments
Introduction
This section describes how to start the robot in a cold environment if it is not starting the normal way.
Problems with starting the robot
Event message from Motion Supervision
Use this procedure if an event message indicates a problem with Motion supervision at start-up. More information about Motion Supervision is found in Technical reference manual - System parameters .
1
2
3
Action
Turn off Motion Supervision.
Start the robot.
When the robot has reached normal working temperature, the Motion Supervision can be turned on again.
Note
Robot stopping with other event message
Use this procedure if the robot is not starting.
1
Action
Start the robot with its normal program but with reduced speed.
Note
The speed can be regulated with the
RAPID instruction VelSet .
Adjusting the speed and acceleration during warm-up
Depending on how cold the environment is and what program is being used, the speed might need to be ramped up until reached maximum. The table shows examples of how to adjust the speed:
Work cycles
3 Work cycles
5 Work cycles
5 Work cycles
5 Work cycles
More than 5 Work cycles
AccSet
20, 20
40, 40
60, 60
100, 100
100, 100
Speed/velocity v100 (100 mm/s) v400 (400 mm/s) v600 (600 mm/s) v1000 (1000 mm/s)
Max.
If the program consists of large wrist movements, it is possible that the reorientation velocity, which is always high in predefined velocities, needs to be included in the ramping up.
118
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.1 Introduction
3 Maintenance
3.1 Introduction
Structure of this chapter
This chapter describes all the maintenance activities recommended for the IRB
6620LX.
It is based on the maintenance schedule found at the beginning of the chapter.
The schedule contains information about required maintenance activities including intervals, and refers to procedures for the activities.
Each procedure contains all the information required to perform the activity, including required tools and materials.
The procedures are gathered in different sections and divided according to the maintenance activity.
Safety information
Observe all safety information before conducting any service work.
There are general safety aspects that must be read through, as well as more specific safety information that describes the danger and safety risks when performing the procedures. Read the chapter
before performing any service work.
Note
If the IRB 6620LX is connected to power, always make sure that the IRB 6620LX is connected to protective earth before starting any maintenance work.
For more information see:
• Product manual - IRC5
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
119
3 Maintenance
3.2.1 Specification of maintenance intervals
3.2 Maintenance schedule and expected component life
3.2.1 Specification of maintenance intervals
Introduction
The intervals are specified in different ways depending on the type of maintenance activity to be carried out and the working conditions of the IRB 6620LX:
• Calendar time: specified in months regardless of whether the system is running or not.
• Operating time: specified in operating hours. More frequent running means more frequent maintenance activities.
• SIS: specified by the robot's SIS (Service Information System). A typical value is given for a typical work cycle, but the value will differ depending on how hard each part is run. The SIS used in M2004 is further described in the
Operating manual - Service Information System .
Overhaul
Depending on application and operational environment a complete overhaul may be necessary in average around 40000 hours.
ABB Connected Services and its Assessment tools can help you to identify the real stress level of your robot, and define the optimal ABB support to maintain your robot working.
Contact your local ABB Customer Service to get more information.
120
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.2.2 Maintenance schedule
3.2.2 Maintenance schedule
General
The robot must be maintained regularly to ensure proper function. The maintenance activities and intervals are specified in the following table.
Non-predictable situations also give rise to inspections of the robot. Any damages must be attended to immediately!
The inspection intervals do not specify the life of each component. Values for these are specified in the section
Expected component life on page 124
Instructions for how to perform the different maintenance activities are found in sections:
•
Inspection activities on page 125
•
Replacement/changing activities on page 143
•
Cleaning activities on page 173
Activities and intervals, robot
The following table specifies the required maintenance activities and intervals.
Maintenance activity
Cleaning
Inspection
Equipment
Robot
Oil level in axis-1 gearbox
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Change
Oil level in axis-2 gearbox
Oil level in axis-3 gearbox
Oil level in axis-4 gearbox
Oil level in axis-5 gearbox
Oil level in axis-6 gearbox
Robot harness
Information labels
Dampers
Mechanical stop
Oil in axis-2 gearbox
Interval
Cleaning the IRB 6620LX on page 173
For more information, see the documentation Operating manual - TM-O
Sizes 40-90 (Güdel) or Operating manual - TM-O 1-4 (Güdel) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) (depending on production year) or visit the homepage
( www.gudel.com
).
Every 12 months.
Every 12 months.
Every 12 months.
Every 12 months.
Every 12 months.
Every 12 months i
.
Every 12 months.
Every 12 months.
Every 12 months.
First change when DTC
• 6,000 hours ii reads:
Second change when DTC
• 24,000 hours
reads:
Following changes:
• Every 24,000 hours.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
121
3 Maintenance
3.2.2 Maintenance schedule
Continued
Maintenance activity
Change
Change
Equipment
Oil in axis-3 gearbox
Oil in axis-4 gearbox
Interval
First change when DTC
• 6,000 hours reads:
Second change when DTC
• 24,000 hours reads:
Following changes:
• Every 24,000 hours.
Every 24,000 hours.
Change
Change
Oil in axis-5 gearbox
Oil in axis-6 gear
Every 24,000 hours.
First change when DTC
• 6,000 hours
reads:
Second change when DTC
• 24,000 hours
reads:
Following changes:
• Every 24,000 hours.
Overhaul Robot Every:
• 40,000 hours.
Replacement Battery pack, measurement system of type RMU101 or
RMU102 (3-pole battery contact)
36 months or battery low alert iii
Replacement Battery pack, measurement system with 2-pole battery contact, e.g. DSQC633A
Battery low alert iv i
Replace when damage or cracks is detected or life limit is approaching that specified in section
Expected component life on page 124 .
ii iii
DTC = Duty Time Counter. Shows the operational time of the robot.
The battery low alert (38213 Battery charge low ) is displayed when the battery needs to be replaced.
The recommendation to avoid an unsynchronized robot is to keep the power to the controller turned on until the battery is to be replaced.
See the replacement instruction for more details.
iv The battery low alert (38213
Battery charge low ) is displayed when remaining backup capacity
(robot powered off) is less than 2 months. The typical lifetime of a new battery is 36 months if the robot is powered off 2 days/week or 18 months if the robot is powered off 16 h/day. The lifetime can be extended with a battery shutdown service routine. See Operating manual - IRC5 with
FlexPendant for instructions.
Activities and intervals, linear axis
The following table specifies the required maintenance activities and intervals.
Maintenance activity
General inspection
Inspection
Change
Replacement
Replacement
Replacement
Replacement
Lubrication
Equipment
Complete linear axis
Interval
100 hours after commissioning
The flat rail tracks and the wiper
Oil
Felt pinion
Auto lubrication battery and the lubricant dispenser (expansion ring)
Every 12 months
Wiper and lubricating element
Lubricating pinion
Ball bearings
Every 12 months
Every 10.000 hours i
Every 12 months
Every 2.000 hours
Every 2.000 hours
Every 2.000 hours
Continues on next page
122 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.2.2 Maintenance schedule
Continued
Maintenance activity Equipment Interval i
Lubrication Rollers Every 2.000 hours
For more information, see Operating manual - TM-O Sizes 40-90 (Güdel) or Operating manual - TM-O
1-4 (Güdel) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) (depending on production year) or visit the homepage ( www.gudel.com
).
Activities and intervals, e-chain
The following table specifies the required maintenance activities and intervals.
Maintenance activity
Inspection
Inspection
Inspection
Equipment
Installed e-chain
Cables and hoses
Guide troughs
Interval
Before start-up.
Before start-up and periodically.
Before start-up and periodically.
Reference
For more information, see Transport and startup - E-chainsystems
(IGUS) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) or visit the homepage
( www.gudel.com
).
For more information, see Transport and startup - E-chainsystems
(IGUS) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) or visit the homepage
( www.gudel.com
).
For more information, see Transport and startup - E-chainsystems
(IGUS) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) or visit the homepage
( www.gudel.com
).
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
123
3 Maintenance
3.2.3 Expected component life
3.2.3 Expected component life
General
The expected life of a specific component of the robot can vary greatly depending on how hard it is run.
Expected component life - protection type Standard
Component
Cable harness
Normal usage i
Expected life
40,000 hours ii
Note
Not including:
• Possible SpotPack harnesses
• Optional upper arm harnesses
Cable harness
Extreme usage iii
20,000 hours
Not including:
• Possible SpotPack harnesses
• Optional upper arm harnesses
Gearboxes iv
40,000 hours i
Examples of "normal usage" in regard to movement: most material handling applications.
ii
Severe chemical or thermal environments, or similar environments, can result in shortened life expectancy.
iii
Examples of "extreme usage" in regard to movement: press tending, very severe palletizing applications, major use of axis 1 movement.
iv The SIS for an IRC5 system is described in the
Operating manual - Service Information System .
124
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.3.1 Inspecting the oil level in axis-1 gearbox
3.3 Inspection activities
3.3.1 Inspecting the oil level in axis-1 gearbox
Documentation
For more information, see Operating manual - TM-O Sizes 40-90 (Güdel) or
Operating manual - TM-O 1-4 (Güdel) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) (depending on production year) or visit the homepage
( www.gudel.com
).
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
125
3 Maintenance
3.3.2 Inspecting the oil level in axis-2 gearbox
3.3.2 Inspecting the oil level in axis-2 gearbox
Location of gearbox
The axis-2 gearbox is located in the lower arm rotational center, underneath the motor attachment.
Location of gearbox on suspended mounted robot
The following figure shows suspended mounted robot.
The gearbox, axis 2, is located in the lower arm rotational center, underneath the motor attachment.
xx0900000144
A
B
C
Oil plug, filling
Oil plug, inspection
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.,
Lubricating oil
Standard toolkit -
Art. no.
Note
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143
.
Note!
Do not mix with other oils!
Content is defined in section
Continues on next page
126 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.3.2 Inspecting the oil level in axis-2 gearbox
Continued
Equipment, etc.,
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-bystep instructions below.
Art. no.
Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Inspecting the oil level in axis-2 gearbox
Use this procedure to inspect the oil level in the axis-2 gearbox.
Action Note
1
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks. Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
2
3
4
5
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
Make sure that the oil temperature is +25°C
±10°C.
This is a precaution to reduce the temperature dependency of the measurement.
Open the oil plug, filling and inspection .
Measure the oil level.
Required oil level: max. 5 mm below the inspection oil plug hole.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 126 .
A
6
7
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Adjust the oil level, if required.
Refit the oil plug.
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
B
C xx1400002785
A Oil plug hole
B Required oil level
C Gearbox oil
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Filling of oil is detailed further in the section
.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
127
3 Maintenance
3.3.3 Inspecting the oil level in axis-3 gearbox
3.3.3 Inspecting the oil level in axis-3 gearbox
Location of gearbox
The axis 3 gearbox is located in the upper arm rotational center as shown in the figure.
xx0900000146
A
B
C
Oil plug, filling
Oil plug, inspection
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lubricating oil
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-bystep instructions below.
-
Art. no.
Note
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Note!
Do not mix with other oils!
Content is defined in section
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Continues on next page
128 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.3.3 Inspecting the oil level in axis-3 gearbox
Continued
Inspecting the oil level in axis-3 gearbox
Use this procedure to inspect the oil level in the axis-3 gearbox.
Action Note
1
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks. Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
2 Move the robot to a position according to the illustration in
Location of gearbox on page 128 .
Detailed in the section
Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes on page 303 .
3
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
4
5
6
Make sure that the oil temperature is +25°C
±10°C.
This is a precaution to reduce the temperature dependency of the measurement.
Open the oil plug, inspection .
Measure the oil level.
Required oil level: max. 5 mm below the inspection oil plug hole.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 128 .
A
7 Adjust the oil level, if required.
8 Refit the oil plug.
B
C xx1400002785
A Oil plug hole
B Required oil level
C Gearbox oil
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Further information about how to fill the oil may be found in the section
Tightening torque:24 Nm
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
129
3 Maintenance
3.3.4 Inspecting the oil level in axis-4 gearbox
3.3.4 Inspecting the oil level in axis-4 gearbox
Location of gearbox
The axis-4 gearbox is located in the rear part of the upper arm as shown in the figure.
xx0900000147
A
B
Oil plug, filling and inspection
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lubricating oil
Standard toolkit -
Art. no.
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-bystep instructions below.
Note
Content is defined in section
.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Continues on next page
130
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.3.4 Inspecting the oil level in axis-4 gearbox
Continued
Inspecting the oil level in axis-4 gearbox
Use this procedure to inspect the oil level in the axis-4 gearbox.
Action Note
1
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks. Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
2 Move the robot to the calibration position.
This is detailed in section
Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes on page 303
.
3
4
5
6
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
Make sure that the oil temperature is +25°C
±10°C.
Open the oil plug, filling and inspection .
This is a precaution to reduce the temperature dependency of the measurement.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 130
.
A
Measure the oil level.
Required oil level: 0-10 mm
7 Adjust the oil level, if required.
8 Refit the oil plug.
B
C xx1400002785
A Oil plug hole
B Required oil level
C Gearbox oil
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Further information about how to fill the oil may be found in the section
.
Tightening torque:24 Nm
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
131
3 Maintenance
3.3.5 Inspecting the oil level in axis-5 gearbox
3.3.5 Inspecting the oil level in axis-5 gearbox
Location of gearbox
The axis-5 gearbox is located in the wrist unit as shown in the figure.
xx0900000155
A
B
Oil plug, filling and inspection
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment etc.
Lubricating oil
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-bystep instructions below.
-
Art. no.
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143
.
Note
Content is defined in section
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Continues on next page
132
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.3.5 Inspecting the oil level in axis-5 gearbox
Continued
Inspecting the oil level in axis-5 gearbox
Use this procedure to inspect the oil level in the axis-5 gearbox.
Action Note
1
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks.
Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
2
3
Move the robot upper arm to a horizontal position.
Turn the wrist unit in a way that both oil plugs are facing upwards.
4
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
5 Make sure that the oil temperature is +25°C
±10°C.
6
7
8
Open the oil plug, filling and inspection
Adjust the oil level, if required.
Refit the oil plug.
.
This is a precaution to reduce the temperature dependency of the measurement.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 132 .
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Further information about how to fill the oil may be found in the section
Filling, oil, axis 5 on page 159 .
Tightening torque:24 Nm
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
133
3 Maintenance
3.3.6 Inspecting the oil level in axis-6 gearbox
3.3.6 Inspecting the oil level in axis-6 gearbox
Location of gearbox
The axis-6 gearbox is located in the wrist unit as shown in this figure.
xx0600002964
A
B
C
Type 1
Axis-6 gearbox
Oil plug, filling and inspection
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment
Lubricating oil
-
Art. no.
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Note
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-bystep instructions below.
Content is defined in section
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Inspecting the oil level in axis-6 gearbox
Use this procedure to inspect the oil level in the axis-6 gearbox.
Action Note
1
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks.
Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
2 Move axes 3 and 5 to a horizontal position, and make sure that the oil plug, filling and inspection is facing upwards.
Continues on next page
134 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.3.6 Inspecting the oil level in axis-6 gearbox
Continued
Action Note
3
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
4
5
Make sure that the oil temperature is +25°C ±10°C.
This is a precaution to reduce the temperature dependency of the measurement.
Open the oil plug, filling and inspection .
A xx1300000244
6
7
Turn axis 6 so that the oil plug, draining faces upwards.
Open the oil plug, draining .
This is a precaution to avoid vacuum effects by allowing air to enter at the top of the gearbox.
Note
If equipment that covers the oil plug, draining is fitted on the robot so that the oil plug cannot be opened, then this step can be skipped.
8
9
Slowly turn axis 4, while adjusting axis 6 so that the oil plug, draining always faces upwards. Turn axis
4 until the axis-4 angle reads -45° to -55°.
Inspect the oil level in the hole for the oil plug, filling and inspection .
The oil should reach all the way up to the external edge of the thread for the oil plug, filling and inspection .
C xx1400002786
Note
If the oil plug, draining is not opened, then use a clean, narrow object, for example an oil stick or a cable tie, to gently poke the oil surface. This will avoid surface tension from stopping air to enter into the gearbox.
A
B
A Oil plug hole
B Required oil level
C Gearbox oil
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
135
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.3.6 Inspecting the oil level in axis-6 gearbox
Continued
10
Action
Adjust the oil level, if required.
11
12
Refit the oil plugs.
WARNING
Do not mix oil types! If wrong oil is refilled, the gearbox must be rinsed as detailed in Technical reference manual - Lubrication in gearboxes .
Note
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143
.
Further information about how to fill the oil may be found in the section
Filling, oil, axis 6 on page 162
.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
136
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.3.7 Inspecting the information labels
3.3.7 Inspecting the information labels
Location of labels
These figures show the location of the information labels to be inspected. The symbols are described in section
Safety symbols on product labels on page 40 .
xx1100000036
F
G
D
E
A
B
C
Warning label concerning high temperature (3 pcs)
Warning sign, symbol of a flash (located on motor cover) (4 pcs)
Warning label concerning brake release
Warning label concerning risk of tipping
Instruction label concerning lifting
Label for calibration
Serial no. from rating label
Required tools and equipment
Visual inspection, no tools are required.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
137
3 Maintenance
3.3.7 Inspecting the information labels
Continued
Inspecting, labels
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply
• hydraulic pressure supply
• air pressure supply to the robot, before entering the robot working area.
2
3
Inspect the labels, located as shown in the figures.
Replace any missing or damaged labels.
Article numbers for the labels and plate set is specified in
Spare part lists on page 351 .
138
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.3.8 Inspecting the axis-1 mechanical stop pin
3.3.8 Inspecting the axis-1 mechanical stop pin
WARNING
Mechanical stop pin can not be fitted onto robot if option 810-1 Electronic Position
Switch is used.
Location of mechanical stop pin
The axis-1 mechanical stop is located as shown in the figure.
xx0900000176
A Mechanical stop ax 1
Required equipment
Visual inspection, no tools are required.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
139
3 Maintenance
3.3.8 Inspecting the axis-1 mechanical stop pin
Continued
Inspecting, mechanical stop pin
Use this procedure to inspect the axis-1 mechanical stop pin.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply
• hydraulic pressure supply
• air pressure supply to the robot, before entering the robot working area.
2 Inspect the axis-1 mechanical stop pin.
If the mechanical stop pin is bent or damaged, it must be replaced.
Note
The expected life of gearboxes can be reduced after collision with the mechanical stop.
140
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3.3.9 Inspecting, signal lamp
Location of signal lamp
The signal lamp is located as shown in this figure.
3 Maintenance
3.3.9 Inspecting, signal lamp xx0600003071
C
D
A
B
E
UL signal lamp
Clamp
Cable strap, outdoor
Motor, axis 3
Attachment screw, M6x8 quality 8-A2F(2 pcs)
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-bystep instructions below.
-
Art. no.
Note
Content is defined in section
.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Inspecting, signal lamp
Use this procedure to inspect the function of the signal lamp.
1
Action
Check that signal lamp is lit when motors are put in operation ("MOTORS ON").
Note
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
141
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.3.9 Inspecting, signal lamp
Continued
Action
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
Note
3 If the lamp is not lit, trace the fault by:
• Checking whether the signal lamp is broken.
If so, replace it.
• Checking cable connections.
• Checking the cabling. Replace cabling if a fault is detected.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 141
.
142
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.1 Type of lubrication in gearboxes
3.4 Replacement/changing activities
3.4.1 Type of lubrication in gearboxes
Introduction
This section describes where to find information about the type of lubrication , article number and the amount of lubrication in the specific gearbox. It also describes the equipment needed when working with lubrication.
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes
Information about the type of lubrication , article number as well as the amount in the specific gearbox can be found in Technical reference manual - Lubrication in gearboxes available for registered users on myABB Business Portal, www.myportal.abb.com
.
Before starting any inspection, maintenance, or changing activities of lubrication, always contact the local ABB Service organization for more information.
For ABB personnel: Always check ABB Library for the latest revision of the manual
Technical reference manual - Lubrication in gearboxes , in order to always get the latest information of updates about lubrication in gearboxes. A new revision will be published on ABB Library immediately after updates.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
143
3 Maintenance
3.4.1 Type of lubrication in gearboxes
Continued
Location of gearboxes
The figure shows the location of the gearboxes.
Equipment xx0900000149
D
E
F
A
B
C
Gearbox, axis 1
Gearbox, axis 2
Gearbox, axis 3
Gearbox, axis 4
Gearbox, axis 5
Gearbox, axis 6
Equipment
Oil dispenser
Nipple for quick connect fitting, with o-ring
Note
Includes pump with outlet pipe.
Use the suggested dispenser or a similar one:
• Orion OriCan article number 22590
(pneumatic)
144
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.2 Changing oil, axis-1 gearbox
3.4.2 Changing oil, axis-1 gearbox
Note
This action demand recalibration of the robot.
Location of oil plugs
Axis 1 gearbox is located between the frame and base. Oil plugs are shown in the figure.
xx0900000148
A
B
C
Vent screw
Oil plug, filling
Oil plug, draining
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
145
3 Maintenance
3.4.2 Changing oil, axis-1 gearbox
Continued
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lubricating oil
Oil collecting vessel
Dial indicator
Standard toolkit -
-
-
Art. no.
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143
.
Amount Note
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143
.
Note
Do not mix with other oils!
Capacity: 8,000 ml.
Content is defined in section
Changing oil, axis 1
Use this procedure to drain oil in gearbox axis 1.
xx0900000210
F
G
D
E
A
B
C
Gearbox axis 1
Attachment screws gearbox
AC motor
Attachment screws motor
Flank
Clutch locking screw
Clutch
Continues on next page
146
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Action
1
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks. Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
2 Move carriage to the zero position, and use a dial indicator to make sure that the carriage remains in position when refitting the gearbox.
Note
3 Maintenance
3.4.2 Changing oil, axis-1 gearbox
Continued
3
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply
• hydraulic pressure supply
• air pressure supply to the robot, before entering the robot working area.
4 Remove R2.MP1 and R2.FB1
connectors from the motor.
xx1400000773
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
147
3 Maintenance
3.4.2 Changing oil, axis-1 gearbox
Continued
5
Action
Loosen the four screws (B) and remove the gearbox (A) with motor (E).
Note
DANGER
The gearbox weight 30 kg
Tip
6
Use a forklift and a loading pallet to secure the gearbox from falling down.
A B C D E xx1400000772
• A: Gearbox axis 1
• B: 4x screws M12x180
• C: Oil plug, draining
• D: 4x motor attachment screws
• E: AC Motor
Loosen the oil plug and drain the gearbox.
Tip
7
Loosen the air screw on the top of the gearbox for easier draining.
Rinse the gearbox with fresh oil.
Note
Use the same oil type.
8
9
10
11
12
13
After rinsing the gearbox refit the air screw.
Fill the gearbox with the correct amount of lubricating oil.
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type of lubrication in gearboxes on page 143
.
Refit the oil plug, filling
Refit the gearbox to the carriage using the four attachment screws
M12x180.
Tightening torque: 83 Nm.
Refit R2.MP1 and R2.FB1 to the motor.
Recalibrate the robot.
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
.
148
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.3 Changing oil, axis-2 gearbox
3.4.3 Changing oil, axis-2 gearbox
Location of oil plugs
The axis-2 gearbox is located in the lower arm rotational center, underneath the motor attachment.
xx0900000144
A
B
C
Oil plug, filling
Oil plug, inspection
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lubricating oil
Art. no.
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Oil collecting vessel -
Oil exchange equipment
3HAC021745-001
Standard toolkit -
Amount
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Note
Note!
Do not mix with other oil types!
Capacity: 5,000 ml.
Content is defined in section
.
Content is defined in section
Continues on next page
149 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.4.3 Changing oil, axis-2 gearbox
Continued
Draining, oil
The procedure below details how to drain the oil in gearbox axis 2.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 149 .
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks. Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
3
4
Remove the oil plug, draining, and drain the gearbox oil using a hose with nipple and an oil collecting vessel.
Shown in the figure
Location of oil plugs on page 149 .
Vessel capacity is specified in
Required equipment on page 149
.
CAUTION
Note
Drain as much oil as possible. See
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants
.
Draining is time-consuming. Elapsed time varies depending on the temperature of the oil.
Refit the oil plug.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
Filling, oil
Use this procedure to fill oil into the axis-2 gearbox.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 149 .
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
Continues on next page
150
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.3 Changing oil, axis-2 gearbox
Continued
Action Note
2
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks.
Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
3
4
Remove the oil plug for filling and the oil plug for inspection .
Shown in the figure
Location of oil plugs on page 149
.
Refill the gearbox with clean lubricating oil.
The correct oil level is detailed in section
Inspecting the oil level in axis-2 gearbox on page 126
.
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
5
Note
Don´t mix Kyodo Yushi TMO 150 with other oil types!
6 Refit the oil plug.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
151
3 Maintenance
3.4.4 Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox
3.4.4 Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox
Location of gearbox
The axis-3 gearbox is located in the upper arm rotational center as shown in the following figure.
xx0900000146
A
B
C
Oil plug, filling
Oil plug, inspection
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lubricating oil
Art. no.
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143
.
Oil exchange equipment 3HAC021745-001
Oil collecting vessel -
Amount Note
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Note!
Do not mix with other oil types!
Content is defined in section
.
Capacity: 3,000 ml.
Continues on next page
152 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Draining, oil
Equipment, etc.
Standard toolkit -
Art. no.
3 Maintenance
3.4.4 Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox
Continued
Amount Note
Content is defined in section
The procedure below details how to drain oil from the gearbox, axis 3.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 152 .
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks. Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36
.
3
4
5
Remove the oil plug, filling .
Remove the oil plug, draining, and drain the gearbox oil using a hose with nipple and an oil collecting vessel.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 152 .
Vessel capacity is specified in
Required equipment on page 152
.
CAUTION
Note
Drain as much oil as possible. See
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
Draining is time-consuming. Elapsed time varies depending on the temperature of the oil.
Refit the oil plug.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
153
3 Maintenance
3.4.4 Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox
Continued
Filling, oil
The procedure below details how to fill oil into the gearbox, axis 3.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 152 .
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks.
Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36
.
3
4
Remove the oil plug, filling.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 152
.
Refill the gearbox with clean lubricating oil.
The correct oil level is detailed in section
Inspecting the oil level in axis-3 gearbox on page 128
.
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
5
Note
Do not mix Kyodo Yushi TMO 150 with other oil types!
6 Refit the oil plug.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
154
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.5 Changing oil, axis-4 gearbox
3.4.5 Changing oil, axis-4 gearbox
Location of gearbox
The axis 4 gearbox is located in the rearmost part of the upper arm as shown in the figure below.
xx0900000147
A
B
Oil plug, filling
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lubricating oil
Art. no.
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143
.
Oil exchange equipment 3HAC021745-001
Oil collecting vessel
Standard toolkit
-
-
Amount
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143
.
Note
Content is defined in section
.
Capacity: 6,000 ml.
Content is defined in section
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
155
3 Maintenance
3.4.5 Changing oil, axis-4 gearbox
Continued
Draining, oil
The procedure below details how to drain the oil in the gearbox, axis 4.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 155 .
Note
1
Action
Run the upper arm -45° from the calibration position.
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
3
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks. Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
4
5
6
7
Remove the oil plug, filling .
Drain the oil from the gearbox into a vessel by opening the oil plug, draining.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 155 .
Vessel capacity is specified in
Required equipment on page 155
.
Run the upper arm back to its calibration position (horizontal position).
This is detailed in section
Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes on page 303
.
Refit the oil plug, draining.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
Filling, oil
The procedure below details how to fill the oil in the gearbox, axis 4.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 155 .
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
Continues on next page
156
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.5 Changing oil, axis-4 gearbox
Continued
Action Note
2
3
4
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks. Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36 .
Refill the gearbox with clean lubricating oil.
The correct oil level is detailed in section
Inspecting the oil level in axis-4 gearbox on page 130
.
Refit the oil plug, filling.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 155
.
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
157
3 Maintenance
3.4.6 Changing oil, axis-5 gearbox
3.4.6 Changing oil, axis-5 gearbox
Location of gearbox
The axis 5 gearbox is located in the wrist unit as shown in the figure below.
xx0900000150
A
B
Oil plug, filling/inspection
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lubricating oil
Art. no.
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Oil exchange equipment 3HAC021745-001
Oil collecting vessel
Standard toolkit
-
-
Amount
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Note
Content is defined in section
Capacity: 4,000 ml.
Content is defined in section
Continues on next page
158
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.6 Changing oil, axis-5 gearbox
Continued
Draining, oil, axis 5
The procedure below details how to change the oil in gearbox, axis 5.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 158 .
Note
1
Action
Run axis 4 to a position where the oil plug for draining is facing downwards.
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
3
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks.
Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36
.
4
5
6
Remove the oil plug, filling .
Drain the oil from the gearbox by opening the oil plug, draining.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 158
.
Vessel capacity is specified in
Required equipment on page 158 .
Refit the oil plug, draining.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
Filling, oil, axis 5
The procedure below details how to change the oil in gearbox, axis 5.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 158 .
1
Action
Run axis 4 to a position where the oil plug, filling, is facing upwards.
Note
2
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks.
Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
159
3 Maintenance
3.4.6 Changing oil, axis-5 gearbox
Continued
Action Note
3
4
5
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
Refill the gearbox with clean lubricating oil.
The correct oil level is detailed in section
Inspecting the oil level in axis-5 gearbox on page 132 .
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 158
.
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Refit the oil plug, filling.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
160
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.7 Changing oil, axis-6 gearbox
3.4.7 Changing oil, axis-6 gearbox
Location of gearbox
The axis 6 gearbox is located in the center of the wrist unit as shown in the figure below.
The figure shows gearbox axis 6 for IRB 6620 Foundry Plus.
xx0600002964
A
B
C
Gearbox axis 6
Oil plug, filling
Oil plug, draining
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lubricating oil
Art. no.
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Oil exchange equipment
3HAC021745-001
Oil collecting vessel -
Standard toolkit -
Amount
See
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143
.
Note
Note
Do not mix with other oils!
Content is defined in section
.
Vessel capacity:
500 ml
Content is defined in section
Draining, oil, axis 6
The procedure below details how to drain oil from the gearbox, axis 6.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 161 .
1
Action
Run the robot to a position where the oil plug, filling of axis 6 gearbox is facing downwards.
Note
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 161 .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
161
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.4.7 Changing oil, axis-6 gearbox
Continued
Action Note
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
3
4
5
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks.
Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36
.
Drain the oil from the gearbox into a vessel by removing the oil plug.
Refit the oil plug, filling .
Vessel capacity is specified in
Required equipment on page 161
.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
Filling, oil, axis 6
The procedure below details how to fill oil into the gearbox, axis 6.
When using the oil exchange equipment, follow the instructions enclosed with the kit. Art. no. for the kit is specified in
Required equipment on page 161 .
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2
WARNING
Handling gearbox oil involves several safety risks.
Before proceeding, please read the safety information in the section
Safety risks during work with gearbox lubricants (oil or grease) on page 36
.
3
4
Remove the oil plug, filling.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 161
.
Refill the gearbox with clean lubricating oil.
The correct oil level is detailed in section
Inspecting the oil level in axis-6 gearbox on page 134
.
Where to find type of oil and total amount is detailed in
Type and amount of oil in gearboxes on page 143 .
Continues on next page
162
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.7 Changing oil, axis-6 gearbox
Continued
5
6
Action
Note
Do not mix Kyodo Yushi TMO 150 with other oil types!
Note
Detailed in the section
Type of lubrication in gearboxes on page 143 .
Refit the oil plug.
Inspect the oil level.
Tightening torque: 24 Nm.
Detailed in the section
Inspecting the oil level in axis-6 gearbox on page 134 .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
163
3 Maintenance
3.4.8 Lubrication of ball bearings and surface rollers
3.4.8 Lubrication of ball bearings and surface rollers
Location of lubrication points xx0900000431
A
B
Lubrication nipple
Cover
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lubricant
Grease gun
Standard tools
Note
Lithium based grease.
2,000 h. lubrication procedure
1
2
3
Action
Remove all 12 covers.
Manually press the grease using a grease gun into each lubrication nipple.
Refit all 12 covers.
Information
164
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.9 Replacing the SMB battery
3.4.9 Replacing the SMB battery
Note
The battery low alert (38213 Battery charge low ) is displayed when the battery needs to be replaced. The recommendation to avoid an unsynchronized robot is to keep the power to the controller turned on until the battery is to be replaced.
For an SMB board with 3-pole battery contact (RMU101 3HAC044168-001 or
RMU102 3HAC043904-001), the lifetime of a new battery is typically 36 months.
For an SMB board with 2-pole battery contact, the typical lifetime of a new battery is 36 months if the robot is powered off 2 days/week or 18 months if the robot is powered off 16 h/day. The lifetime can be extended for longer production breaks with a battery shutdown service routine. See Operating manual - IRC5 with
FlexPendant for instructions.
WARNING
See instructions for batteries,
Safety risks during handling of batteries on page 35
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
165
3 Maintenance
3.4.9 Replacing the SMB battery
Continued
Location of SMB battery
The SMB battery (SMB = serial measurement board) is located on the left hand side of the frame as shown in the figure below.
A
B
H
G
C
D1
D2
E
F xx0900000151
A
B
C
D1
D2
Continues on next page
166
Attachment screws
SMB/BU unit (complete)
Velcro strap
Battery pack (2-pole battery contact)
Battery pack (3-pole battery contact)
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.9 Replacing the SMB battery
Continued
G
H
E
F
SMB/BU box
Connection point, battery cable
SMB (Serial measurement board)
BU unit (Brake release unit)
Required equipment
Note
There are two variants of SMB units and batteries. One with 2-pole battery contact and one with 3-pole battery contact. The variant with the 3-pole battery contact has longer lifetime for the battery.
It is important that the SMB unit uses the correct battery. Make sure to order the correct spare parts. Do not replace the battery contact!
Equipment, etc.
Battery pack
Standard toolkit
Circuit diagram -
-
Spare part no.
For spare part no.
see:
•
Note
Battery includes protection circuits. Only replace with a specified spare part or an ABBapproved equivalent.
Content is defined in section
See chapter
.
Removing, battery
Use this procedure to remove the SMB battery.
1
Action
Move the robot to its calibration position.
Note
This is done in order to facilitate updating of the revolution counter.
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply
• hydraulic pressure supply
• air pressure supply to the robot, before entering the robot working area.
3 xx0200000023
WARNING
The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit please read the safety information in the section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 31
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
167
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.4.9 Replacing the SMB battery
Continued
4
Action
Remove SMB/BU box by unscrewing the attachment screws.
Note
CAUTION
Clean cover from metal residues before opening.
Metal residues can cause shortage on the boards which can result in hazardous failures.
5
6
7
Lift the SMB/BU unit out of its box and disconnect the battery cable.
Remove the velcro strap that holds the battery.
Remove the SMB battery.
Battery includes protection circuits. Only replace with a specified spare part or with an ABB- approved equivalent.
Shown in figure
Location of SMB battery on page 166 .
Refitting, battery
Use this procedure to refit the SMB battery.
Action
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply
• hydraulic pressure supply
• air pressure supply to the robot, before entering the robot working area.
2
Note xx0200000023
3
4
5
WARNING
The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit please read the safety information in the section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 31
Reconnect the battery cable to the SMB battery pack and secure it with the velcro strap .
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 167 .
Shown in figure
Location of SMB battery on page 166
.
Put the SMB/BU unit back into the box and secure it with its attachment screws .
Shown in figure
Location of SMB battery on page 166
.
Update the revolution counter.
Detailed in chapter Calibration section
Updating revolution counters on page 314
.
Continues on next page
168
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.9 Replacing the SMB battery
Continued
Action
6
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Note
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
169
3 Maintenance
3.4.10 Replacement of felt pinion
3.4.10 Replacement of felt pinion
Location xx0900000277
I
H
F
G
C
D
A
B
E
Screws
Distance piece
Lubrication pinion
O-ring
Chamber
Fixing bolts
Washer
Lubrication fitting
Car plate
Continues on next page
170
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.4.10 Replacement of felt pinion
Continued
Replacing the felt pinion
Action Information
1
DANGER
Turn off all electric power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot.
2
3
4
5
6
If available, separate the automatic lubrication.
Remove the two fixing bolts.
(F) in figure.
Remove the lubrication pinion unit.
Remove the four screws holding the distance piece.
(A) in figure.
Remove the chamber, o-ring and lubrication pinion.
(C, D, E) in figure.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
171
3 Maintenance
3.4.11 Replacing the lubricant cartridge and battery
3.4.11 Replacing the lubricant cartridge and battery
Documentation
For more information, see System manual - Automatic lubrication system (Güdel) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) or visit the homepage
( www.gudel.com
).
172
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.5.1 Cleaning the IRB 6620LX
3.5 Cleaning activities
3.5.1 Cleaning the IRB 6620LX
Special points
WARNING
Turn off all electrical power supplies to the manipulator before entering its work space.
Special points to be observed are shown in the figure below.
xx0900000152
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
173
3 Maintenance
3.5.1 Cleaning the IRB 6620LX
Continued
A
B
C
D
E
Spiral cables to motor 6
Inside of upper arm tube
Rear of upper arm tube
SMB/BU box
R1.MP/R1.SMB
General
To secure high uptime it is important that the IRB 6620LX is cleaned regularly. The frequency of cleaning depends on the environment in which the product works.
Different cleaning methods are allowed depending on the type of protection of the
IRB 6620LX.
Note
Always verify the protection type of the robot before cleaning.
Oil spills
Oil spills from gearboxes
Use the following procedure if any oil spills are detected that can be suspected to originate from a gearbox.
1 Inspect that the oil level in the suspected gearbox is according to the recommendations, see
Inspection activities on page 125 .
2 Write down the oil level.
3 Inspect the oil level again after, for example, 6 months.
4 If the oil level is decreased then replace the gearbox.
Special cleaning considerations
This section specifies some special considerations when cleaning the robot.
• Always use cleaning equipment as specified. Any other cleaning equipment may shorten the life of the robot.
• Always check that all protective covers are fitted to the robot before cleaning.
• Never point the water jet at connectors, joints, sealings, or gaskets.
• Do not use compressed air to clean the robot.
• Never use solvents that are not approved by ABB to clean the robot.
• Do not spray from a distance closer than 0.4 m.
• Do not remove any covers or other protective devices before cleaning the robot.
Continues on next page
174
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
3 Maintenance
3.5.1 Cleaning the IRB 6620LX
Continued
Cleaning methods
The following table defines what cleaning methods are allowed depending on the protection type.
i
Protection type
Standard
Foundry Plus
Cleaning method
Vacuum cleaner
Yes
Wipe with cloth Rinse with water
Yes
Yes. With light cleaning detergent.
Yes. It is highly recommended that the water contains a rust-prevention solution and that the manipulator is dried afterwards.
Yes. With light cleaning detergent or spirit.
Yes. It is highly recommended that the water contains a rust-prevention solution.
High pressure water or steam
No
Yes i
.
It is highly recommended that the water and steam contains rust preventive, without cleaning detergents.
Perform according to section
Cleaning with water and steam on page 175 .
Cleaning with water and steam
Instructions for rinsing with water
ABB robots with protection types Standard , Foundry Plus , Wash , or Foundry Prime can be cleaned by rinsing with water (water cleaner).
1
I
The following list defines the prerequisites:
• Maximum water pressure at the nozzle: 700 kN/m
2
(7 bar)
I
• Fan jet nozzle should be used, min. 45° spread
• Minimum distance from nozzle to encapsulation: 0.4 meters
• Maximum flow: 20 liters/min
Typical tap water pressure and flow
Instructions for steam or high pressure water cleaning
ABB robots with protection types Foundry Plus , Wash , or Foundry Prime can be cleaned using a steam cleaner or high pressure water cleaner.
2
The following list defines the prerequisites:
• Maximum water pressure at the nozzle: 2500 kN/m
2
(25 bar)
• Fan jet nozzle should be used, min. 45° spread
• Minimum distance from nozzle to encapsulation: 0.4 meters
• Maximum water temperature: 80° C
Cables
Movable cables need to be able to move freely:
• Remove waste material, such as sand, dust and chips, if it prevents cable movement.
1
2
See
for exceptions.
See
for exceptions.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
175
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
3 Maintenance
3.5.1 Cleaning the IRB 6620LX
Continued
• Clean the cables if they have a crusty surface, for example from dry release agents.
176
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.1 Introduction
4 Repair
4.1 Introduction
Structure of this chapter
This chapter describes all repair activities recommended for the IRB 6620LX and any external unit.
It is made up of separate procedures, each describing a specific repair activity.
Each procedure contains all the information required to perform the activity, for example spare parts numbers, required special tools, and materials.
WARNING
Repair activities not described in this chapter must only be carried out by ABB.
Otherwise damage to the mechanics and electronics may occur.
Required equipment
The details of the equipment required to perform a specific repair activity are listed in the respective procedures.
The details of equipment are also available in different lists in the chapter
Reference information on page 341
.
Safety information
There are general safety information and specific safety information. The specific safety information describes the danger and safety risks while performing specific steps in a procedure. Make sure to read through the chapter
before commencing any service work.
Note
If the IRB 6620LX is connected to power, always make sure that the IRB 6620LX is connected to earth before starting any repair work.
For more information see:
• Product manual - IRC5
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
177
4 Repair
4.2.1 Performing a leak-down test
4.2 General procedures
4.2.1 Performing a leak-down test
When to perform a leak-down test
After refitting any motor and gearbox, the integrity of all seals enclosing the gearbox oil must be tested. This is done in a leak-down test.
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Leak-down tester
Leak detection spray -
-
Article number Note
Performing a leak-down test
1
2
3
Action
Finish the refitting procedure of the motor or gear in question.
Note
Remove the upper oil plug on the gear and replace it with the leak-down tester.
Regulators, which are included in the leak-down test, may be required.
Use caution, apply compressed air and raise the pressure with the knob until the correct value is shown on the manometer.
Correct value:
0.2-0.25 bar (20-25 kPa)
CAUTION
The pressure must under no circumstance be higher than 0.25 bar (20-25 kPa). Also during the time when the pressure is raised.
4
5
6
7
8
Disconnect the compressed air supply.
Wait for approximately 8-10 minutes and make sure that no pressure loss occurs.
If the compressed air is significantly colder or warmer than the gearbox to be tested, a slight pressure increase or decrease may occur. This is quite normal.
If any pressure drop occurred, then localize the leak as described in step
If no pressure drop occurred, then remove the leakdown tester and refit the oil plug. The test is complete.
Spray any suspected leak areas with the leak detection spray. Bubbles indicate a leak.
When the leak has been localized, take the necessary measures to correct the leak.
178
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.2.2 Mounting instructions for bearings
4.2.2 Mounting instructions for bearings
General
This section describes how to mount and grease different types of bearings on the robot.
Equipment
Equipment, etc.
Grease
Article number
3HAB3537-1
Note
Used to grease the bearings, if not specified otherwise.
Assembly of all bearings
Attend to the following instructions while mounting a bearing on the robot.
1
2
3
Action
To avoid contamination, let a new bearing remain in its wrapping until it is time for fitting.
Note
Ensure that the parts included in the bearing fitting are free from burrs, grinding waste, and other contamination. Cast components must be free of foundry sand.
Bearing rings, inner rings, and roller elements must not be subjected to direct impact. The roller elements must not be exposed to any stresses during the assembly work.
Assembly of tapered bearings
Follow the preceding instructions for the assembly of the bearings when mounting a tapered bearing on the robot.
In addition to those instructions, the following procedure must be carried out to enable the roller elements to adjust to the correct position against the race flange.
1
Action
Tension the bearing gradually until the recommended pre-tension is achieved.
Note
Note
The roller elements must be rotated a specified number of turns before pretensioning is carried out and also rotated during the pre-tensioning sequence.
2 Make sure the bearing is properly aligned as this will directly affect the durability of the bearing.
Greasing of bearings
Note
This instruction is not valid for solid oil bearings.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
179
4 Repair
4.2.2 Mounting instructions for bearings
Continued
The bearings must be greased after assembly according to the following instructions:
• The bearings must not be completely filled with grease. However, if space is available beside the bearing fitting, the bearing may be totally filled with grease when mounted, as excessive grease will be pressed out from the bearing when the robot is started.
• During operation, the bearing should be filled to 70-80% of the available volume.
• Ensure that grease is handled and stored properly to avoid contamination.
Grease the different types of bearings as following description:
• Grooved ball bearings must be filled with grease from both sides.
• Tapered roller bearings and axial needle bearings must be greased in the split condition.
180
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.2.3 Mounting instructions for seals
4.2.3 Mounting instructions for seals
General
This section describes how to mount different types of seals.
Equipment
Equipment, etc.
Grease
Article number
3HAB3537-1
Note
Used to lubricate the seals.
Rotating seals
The procedure below describes how to fit rotating seals.
CAUTION
Please observe the following before commencing any assembly of seals:
• Protect the sealing surfaces during transport and mounting.
• Keep the seal in its original wrappings or protect it well before actual mounting.
• The fitting of seals and gears must be carried out on clean workbenches.
• Use a protective sleeve for the sealing lip during mounting, when sliding over threads, keyways, etc.
1
2
3
4
Action
Check the seal to ensure that:
• The seal is of the correct type (provided with cutting edge).
• There is no damage to the sealing edge (feel with a fingernail).
Inspect the sealing surface before mounting. If scratches or damage are found, the seal must be replaced since it may result in future leakage.
Note
Lubricate the seal with grease just before fitting. (Not too early - there is a risk of dirt and foreign particles adhering to the seal.)
Fill 2/3 of the space between the dust tongue and sealing lip with grease. The rubber coated external diameter must also be greased, unless otherwise specified.
Article number is specified in
Mount the seal correctly with a mounting tool.
Never hammer directly on the seal as this may result in leakage.
Make sure no grease left on the robot surface.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
181
4 Repair
4.2.3 Mounting instructions for seals
Continued
Flange seals and static seals
The following procedure describes how to fit flange seals and static seals.
1
2
3
4
Action
Check the flange surfaces. They must be even and free from pores.
It is easy to check flatness using a gauge on the fastened joint (without sealing compound).
If the flange surfaces are defective, the parts may not be used because leakage could occur.
Clean the surfaces properly in accordance with the recommendations of ABB.
Distribute the sealing compound evenly over the surface, preferably with a brush.
Tighten the screws evenly when fastening the flange joint.
O-rings
The following procedure describes how to fit o-rings.
1
2
3
4
5
Action Note
Ensure that the correct o-ring size is used.
Check the o-ring for surface defects, burrs, shape accuracy, or deformation.
Check the o-ring grooves.
The grooves must be geometrically correct and should be free of pores and contamination.
Defective o-rings may not be used.
Lubricate the o-ring with grease.
Defective o-rings, including damaged or deformed o-rings, may not be used.
Tighten the screws evenly while assembling.
Make sure that no grease is left on the robot surface.
182
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.2.4 Cut the paint or surface on the robot before replacing parts
4.2.4 Cut the paint or surface on the robot before replacing parts
General
Follow the procedures in this section whenever breaking the paint of the robot during replacement of parts.
Required equipment
Equipment
Cleaning agent
Knife
Spare parts
Lint free cloth
Touch up paint Standard/Foundry
Plus, ABB Orange
3HAC037052-001
Removing
Note
Ethanol
1
Action
Cut the paint with a knife in the joint between the part that will be removed and the structure, to avoid that the paint cracks.
Description
2 Carefully grind the paint edge that is left on the structure to a smooth surface.
xx0900000121
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
183
4 Repair
4.2.5 The brake release buttons may be jammed after service work
4.2.5 The brake release buttons may be jammed after service work
Description
The brake release unit has push-buttons for the brake release of each axis motor.
When service work is performed inside the SMB recess that includes removal and refitting of the brake release unit, the brake release buttons may be jammed after refitting.
DANGER
If the power is turned on while a brake release button is jammed in depressed position, the affected motor brake is released. This may cause serious personal injuries and damage to the robot.
Elimination
1
2
3
To eliminate the danger after service work has been performed inside the SMB recess, follow the procedure below.
4
Action
Make sure the power is turned off.
Remove the push-button guard, if necessary.
Verify that the push-buttons of the brake release unit are working by pressing them down, one by one.
Make sure none of the buttons are jammed in the tube.
If a button gets jammed in the depressed position, the alignment of the brake release unit must be adjusted so that the buttons can move freely in their tubes.
184
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.3.1 Replacing the robot
4.3 Complete robot
4.3.1 Replacing the robot
General
Before replacing the robot, save a reference using the laser adjustment kit and use the reference to place the replacing robot in the same position.
Required tools and equipment
Equipment
Calpoint kit
Turning disc set
Standard toolkit
Article number
3HAC049300-001
Note
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
-
3HAC048787-001
Content is defined in section
Assembling and attaching the laser adjustment kit on robot that is to be replaced
4
5
1
2
3
Action
Remove the customer tool and/or harness.
Note
Attach the Calpoint laser on to the Calpoint multimount.
A part of assembling the laser adjustment kit.
Attach the Calpoint multi-mount on to the turning disc.
A part of assembling the laser adjustment kit. The Calpoint multimount is included in the Calpoint kit.
Put a guide pin in the robot tool flange.
Attach the laser adjustment kit on to the robot tool flange.
xx1700001006
6
7
Tighten the conical screw on the turning disc.
Tighten all the screws.
Saving a reference using robot that is to be replaced
1
Action
Program a MoveAbsJ position and set all axes to
0.
Note
Note
If not possible, select another suitable position.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
185
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.3.1 Replacing the robot
Continued
2
3
4
5
Action
Aim the robot and choose a target.
Note
Aim the robot in a way so that any adjustment on the robot foot to the axis 1 carrier makes a big difference on where the laser is aimed. The distance from the laser pointer to where the laser is aimed has to be at least 2 m. The accuracy will be increased if the distance is increased.
Program two MoveAbsJ positions. The last as the fine position used for the adjustment and the first as a preposition.
Note
Make sure all axes are included in the preposition movement as it eliminates any gear lash.
Run the preposition and the fine position repeatedly and ensure that the laser point is in the same position when the fine point is reached.
Mark a target where the laser point is aimed when the fine position has been reached.
Note
6 Carefully remove the laser adjustment kit from the robot.
Note
Make sure not to change the position of the Calpoint laser pointer in relation to the turning disc.
xx1700001007
Replacing the robot
1
Action Note
Replace the robot and update the system with the correct calibration offset for axis 2-6.
See
Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool on page 74
.
Adjusting the replacing robot to align with the marked target
1
Action
Carefully attach the laser adjustment kit to the replacing robot.
Note
Make sure not to change the position of the Calpoint laser pointer in relation to the turning disc.
Note
Continues on next page
186 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
2
3
Action
Run the preposition and then the fine position.
Loosen the six attachment screws of the robot base until you see a gap between the robot and the carriage.
Note
4 Repair
4.3.1 Replacing the robot
Continued
4
5 xx0900000188
A Attachment screws (6 pcs)
Manually apply enough force and adjust the robot to the axis 1 carrier so that the laser point aligns with the marked target.
Note
It is only possible to adjust the robot to the axis
1 carrier so that the laser point corresponds with the laser target in one direction and that will be the rotational direction for the robot foot to axis 1 carrier.
xx1700001008
Note
It is possible that the laser point deviates from laser target in the non-rotational direction to the extent that it is difficult to validate if the position is good in the rotational direction. If that is the case, then jog only axis 2 so that the laser point is as close as possible to the laser target.
Tighten the attachment screws.
6 Run the preposition and the fine position.
xx0900000188
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
187
4 Repair
4.3.1 Replacing the robot
Continued
7
Action
Validate if the laser point corresponds with the marked target.
Note
8 Repeat the steps until the laser point corresponds to the marked target.
xx1700001007
188
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.3.2 Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2)
4.3.2 Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2)
General
The cable harness 1-6 is undivided.
Replacement of the cable harness is detailed in two steps - lower end and upper end.
The procedure below details replacement of the lower end of the cable harness.
The procedure for replacing the upper end is detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, upper end on page 195 .
Location of cable harness, axes 1-2
The cable harness for axes 1-2 is run throughout the base and frame as shown in the figure below.
The figure shows the upper routing of the cable harness xx0900000161
A
B
C
Upper arm cable harness
Metal clamp, lower arm (2 pieces)
Cable bundle
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
189
4 Repair
4.3.2 Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2)
Continued
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Cable harness
Standard toolkit
Spare part no.
See
.
Art. no.
-
Note
Other tools and procedures may be required.
See references to these procedures in the stepby-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram
Content is defined in section
These procedures include references to the tools required.
See chapter
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action Note
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the cable harness, axes 1-2.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
Continues on next page
190 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.3.2 Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2)
Continued
2
Action
In order to facilitate refitting of the cable harness, run the robot to the specified positions:
• Axis 1: no signifiance
• Axis 2: 0°
• Axis 3: 0°
• Axis 4: 0°
• Axis 5: +90°
• Axis 6: no significance
Note
3
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
4 Disconnect the earth cable.
5
6
7 xx0900000163
• A: Earth connection
Disconnect connectors R1.MP
and R1.SMB
on the connection plate, base .
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness, axes
Disconnect all connectors at motors 1 R2.MP1, R2.FB1
and
2 R2.MP2, R2.FB2
.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness, axes
Remove the metal clamps on the frame, securing the cable harness.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness, axes
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
191
4 Repair
4.3.2 Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2)
Continued
8
Action
Remove the attachment screws holding the SMB/BU unit in its box .
The cable between the battery and the SMB/BU unit may stay connected in order to avoid an update of the revolution counter. If the battery cable is disconnected, an update of the revolution counter is necessary!
Note
Refitting
9
10
11 xx0600003026
• A: Attachment screws, M5x12 quality 8.8 (7 pcs)
• B: SMB/BU unit
• C: Battery unit
• D: Box
Carefully lift the SMB/BU unit out of its box , while at the same time lifting the cables of the harness.
Pull the cable harness and its connectors carefully up through the cable guide in the center of the frame.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness, axes
Continue removal of the cable harness, axes 3-6.
Detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, upper end on page 195 .
The procedure below details how to refit the cable harness axes 1-2.
1
2
Action Note
Push the cable harness axes 1-
2 carefully down through the cable guide in the center of the frame.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness, axes
Reconnect the connectors
R1.MP
and R1.SMB
at the connection plate, base .
Tightening torque for R1.SMB: 10 Nm.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness, axes
Continues on next page
192
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.3.2 Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2)
Continued
3
Action
Reconnect the earth cable.
Note
4 Put the SMB/BU unit carefully back into its box and refit its attachment screws .
xx0900000163
• A: Earth connection
5
6
7
8 xx0600003026
• A : Attachment screws, M5x12 quality 8.8 (7 pcs)
• B : SMB/BU unit
• C : Battery unit
• D : Box
Reconnect all connectors at motors 1 R2.MP1, R2,FB1 and
2 R2.MP2, R2.FB2
.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness, axes
Refit the metal clamps on the frame, securing the cable harness.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness, axes
Refit the top cover, connection box .
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness, axes
Recalibrate the robot.
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
193
4 Repair
4.3.2 Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2)
Continued
Action
9
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Note
194
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Introduction
The cable harness 1-6 is undivided.
Replacing the cable harness is described in two steps:
• lower end (axes 1-2)
• upper end (axes 3-6)
This procedure details how to replace the upper end.
For description of how to replace the lower end, see
Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2) on page 189
.
Location of cable harness
The cable harness for the axes 3 to 6 runs throughout the lower and upper arm as shown in the figure below: xx0600003078
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
Cable harness
Metal clamp, at gearbox axis 3
Attachment screws, metal clamp at gearbox axis 3, M6x16 quality 8.8 (2 pcs)
Metal clamp, lower arm (2 pcs)
Attachment screws, metal clamp lower arm, M6x16 quality 8.8 (2+2 pcs)
Metal clamp, armhouse
Attachment screws, metal clamp armhouse, M6x16 quality 8.8 (2 pcs)
Continues on next page
195 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Continued
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Cable harness axes 1-6
Gasket
Gasket
Note
See
Spare part lists on page 351 .
Motors axes 1-5
See
Spare part lists on page 351 .
Motor axis 6. Recommended to be changed for Foundry Plus.
See
Spare part lists on page 351 .
Retrofit set Foundry Plus, wrist
Retrofit set Foundry Plus, upper arm axis 4
See
Spare part lists on page 351 .
See
Spare part lists on page 351 .
Standard toolkit Content is defined in section
.
Other tools and procedures may be required.
See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Circuit diagram See chapter
.
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action Note
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Continues on next page
196
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Removal
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Continued
The procedure below details how to remove the cable harness.
1
2
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
In order to facilitate refitting of the cable harness, run the robot to the specified positions:
• Axis 1: no significance
• Axis 2: 0°
• Axis 3: 0°
• Axis 4: 0°
• Axis 5: +90°
• Axis 6: no significance
3
DANGER
4
5
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
Before starting the removal of cable harness axes 3-6, first remove cable harness axes
1-2.
Detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2) on page 189
.
Remove the cover, wrist unit in order to reach the cable harness at axes 5 and 6.
Note
Foundry Plus
Make sure not to lose the washers placed in the holes of the foundry gasket.
xx0600003024
• A : Cover, wrist unit xx1400002580
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
197
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Continued
6
Action
Remove the metal clamp securing the cable harness at axis 5 by removing its attachment screws .
Note
7 Remove the cover at motor axis 5 by removing its attachment screws.
Also remove the cover motor, axis 5 by removing its attachment screws and disconnect the motor cables R2.MP5
and R2.FB5
.
xx0600003030
• A : Cable harness
• B : Motor, axis 5
• C : Attachment screw, M6x16 8.8
(2 pcs)
• D : Metal clamp
8 Remove the cable holder in the wrist unit by unscrewing the three attachment screws .
Two of the attachment screws (M6x16) are visibly located at the rear of the cable holder. The third screw (M4x12) is located at the bottom of the cable holder, securing the carrier.
xx0600003032
• A : Cover
• B : Attachment screw M6X30 8.8 (2 pcs)
• C : Cover motor, axis 5
• D : Attachment screws motor
Continues on next page
198 xx0600003034
• A : Cable holder
• B : Attachment screws M6x16, 8.8
(2 pcs)
• C : Attachment screw M4x12, 8-
A2F (securing the carrier)
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Continued
9
10
Action
Remove the back cover motor, axis 6 by removing its attachment screws.
Pull out the cabling R2.MP6
and R2.FB6
from motor axis 6 .
11 Disconnect all connectors at motor axis 6
R2.MP6
and R2.FB6
.
Note
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness on page 195
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness on page 195
12
13
Remove the cover of motor axes 3 and 4 by removing its attachment screws.
Disconnect all connectors at motor axes 3
R2.MP3, R2.FB3
and 4 R2.MP4, R2.FB.4
.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness on page 195
14 Remove the metal clamps , two on the lower arm, one on gearbox axis 3 and one on the armhouse.
15 Foundry Plus
Remove the Foundry Plus arm house cover.
xx0600003083
• A : Metal clamp, lower arm (2 pcs)
• B : Metal clamp, gearbox axis 3
• C : Metal clamp, armhouse
16
17
Use caution and pull out the cable harness of the upper arm.
Tie the connectors into a bundle, to avoid damaging them during further removal.
xx1400002582
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
199
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Continued
Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the cable harness.
1
2
3
4
5
Action
Begin by refitting the cable harness lower end (axes 1-2).
Note
Detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2) on page 189 .
Insert the cable harness gently from the rear into the upper arm.
Arrange the cable harness as shown in the figure
Location of cable harness on page 195
Place the cabling to motor axis 6 correctly on the upper arm and pull the connectors carefully through the hole on top of the wrist unit to motor, axis 6.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness on page 195
We recommend changing the gasket on the cover for Foundry Plus robots.
Reconnect all connectors at motor axes 3
(R2.MP3, R2.FB3) and 4 (R2.MP4, R2.FB4) .
Refit covers motor axes 3 and 4. Make sure to turn the revolution indicator with the green side towards axis 4 center.
6 Refit the cable holder wrist unit with the three attachment screws.
Two of the attachment screws (M6x16) are visibly located at the rear of the cable holder. The third screw (M4x10) is located at the bottom of the cable holder, securing the carrier.
xx1500002404
7
8 xx0600003034
• A : Cable holder
• B : Attachment screws M6x16, quality 8.8 (2 pcs)
• C . Attachment screws M4x10, quality 8-A2F (securing the carrier)
Reconnect the motor cables axis 6 R2.MP6
and R2.FB6
.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness on page 195
Refit cover motor, axis 6.
Continues on next page
200 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Continued
9
10
Action Note
Reconnect the motor cables axis 5 R2.MP5
and R2.FB5
.
Shown in the figure
Location of cable harness on page 195
Refit the cover motor, axis 5 (C) and cover
(A) .
11 Refit the metal clamp securing the cable harness at axis 5.
xx0600003032
• A : Cover
• B : Attachment screws M6x30, 8.8
(2 pcs)
• C : Cover motor, axis 5
• D : Attachment screws xx0600003030
• A : Cable harness
• B : Motor, axis 5
• C : Attachment screws M6x16, 8.8
(2 pcs)
• D : Metal clamp
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
201
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Continued
12
Action
Refit the four metal clamps , two on the lower arm, one on gearbox axis 3 and one on the armhouse.
Note xx0600003083
• A : Metal clamp, lower arm (2 pcs)
• B : Metal clamp, gearbox axis 3
• C : Metal clamp, armhouse
13 Standard
Fit the wrist cover.
14 Foundry Plus
Make sure the wrist cover gasket and the small gasket fitted in the recess of the wrist cover are undamaged. Replace if damaged.
xx0600003024
• A : Cover, wrist unit xx1400002579
Continues on next page
202
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Continued
15
Action
Foundry Plus
Make sure the washers are fitted in the gasket holes.
Note
16
17
Foundry Plus
Fit the wrist cover, Foundry Plus.
Make sure the gasket stays undamaged after fitting. Replace if damaged.
Foundry Plus
Make sure the gasket on the adapter ring is undamaged. Replace if damaged.
xx1400002580
18 Foundry Plus
Fit the Foundry Plus cover on the adapter ring.
xx1400002581
19 Make sure the gasket on the adapter ring is undamaged. Replace if damaged.
xx1400002582
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
203
4 Repair
4.3.3 Replacement of cable harness, upper end
Continued
20
Action
Recalibrate the robot.
21
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26
.
Note
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
.
204
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.4.1 Replacing the turning disk
4.4 Upper and lower arm
4.4.1 Replacing the turning disk
Location of turning disk
The turning disk is located in the front of the wrist housing as shown in the figure below.
The figure shows the turning disk on an IRB 6620 Foundry Plus/IRB 6620LX.
xx0600003082
C
D
A
B
E
Turning disk
Wrist unit
Oil plug, draining
Oil plug, filling
Attachment screws, turning disk (6 pcs)
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Turning disk
Art. no.
For spare part no.
see:
Spare part lists on page 351 .
Note
O-rings are not included!
O-ring
Wrist, type 1
O-ring
Wrist, type 2
Grease
Flange sealant
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the stepby-step instructions below.
3HAB3772-65 (1pc)
21520431-20 (6 pcs)
Must be replaced when replacing the turning disk!
3HAB3772-64 (1 pc)
3HAB3772-61 (12 pcs)
For IRB 6620 Foundry Plus.
Must be replaced when replacing the turning disk!
-
3HAB3537-1
3HAC034903-001
Used to lubricate the o-rings.
Loctite 574
Content is defined in section
.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
205
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.4.1 Replacing the turning disk
Continued
Removing, turning disk
Use this procedure to remove the turning disk.
1
Action Note
Run the robot to a position where the oil plug, draining of axis 6 gearbox faces downwards.
Shown in the figure
Location of turning disk on page 205
.
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply
• hydraulic pressure supply
• air pressure supply to the robot, before entering the robot working area.
3
4
5
6
7
Remove any equipment fitted to the turning disk.
Drain the axis 6 gearbox.
See section
•
Changing oil, axis-6 gearbox on page 161
Remove the attachment screws that secure the turning disk.
Remove the turning disk .
Foundry Plus:
Remove old flange sealant residues and other contamination from the contact surfaces.
Shown in the figure
Location of turning disk on page 205
.
Continues on next page
206
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.4.1 Replacing the turning disk
Continued
Refitting, turning disk
Use this procedure to refit the turning disk.
1
Action Note
Lubricate the o-ring of the turning disk with grease and fit it to the turning disk.
Also fit the six o-rings, when refitting the attachment screws.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 205
.
2 Foundry Plus:
Apply Loctite 574 flange sealant on the contact surface.
xx0200000218
• A: Sealing surface, o-ring xx1400000995
3
4
5
6
Secure the turning disk with its screws .
attachment
Perform a leak-down test of the gearbox axis
6.
Refill the axis 6 gearbox with oil.
6 pcs M14 x 25, 12.9 quality.
Tightening torque: 175 Nm
Reused screws may be used, providing they are lubricated as detailed in section
before fitting.
Detailed in the section
Performing a leak-down test on page 178
.
See section
•
Changing oil, axis-6 gearbox on page 161
Refit any equipment removed during disassembly to the turning disk.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
207
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.4.1 Replacing the turning disk
Continued
Action
7
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Note
208
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.4.2 Replacement of wrist unit
4.4.2 Replacement of wrist unit
Location of wrist unit
The wrist unit is located in the foremost part of the upper arm as shown in the figure below.
xx0600003055
D
E
F
A
B
C
I
G
H
Wrist unit
Turning disk
Cover, wrist unit
Cable holder
Cover, cable gland
Metal clamp
Wrist unit, attachment screws
Cable harness, axis 6
Cable harness, axis 5
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Wrist unit
Spare part no.
See
.
Art. no.
Wrist unit, insulated See
.
Retrofit set Foundry Plus, wrist
See
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Note
Continues on next page
209
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.4.2 Replacement of wrist unit
Continued
Equipment, etc.
Spare part no.
Retrofit set Foundry Plus, upper arm axis 4
See
.
Art. no.
Roundsling
Grease
Standard toolkit -
-
3HAB 3537-1
Other tools and procedures may be required.
See references to these procedures in the stepby-step instructions below.
Note
Used to lubricate o-rings.
Content is defined in section
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
Note
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the wrist unit.
1
2
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Move the robot to a suitable position for removal of the wrist unit.
Note
Continues on next page
210 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.4.2 Replacement of wrist unit
Continued
Action Note
3
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
4
5
Remove all equipment fitted to the wrist unit .
Shown in the figure in
Location of wrist unit on page 209
.
Remove the cover, wrist unit in order to reach the cable harness.
Shown in the figure
Location of wrist unit on page 209
.
Note
Foundry Plus
Make sure not to lose the washers placed in the holes of the Foundry Plus gasket.
xx1400002580
6 Remove the cable harness, axes 5 and 6.
Detailed in section
Replacement of cable harness, upper end on page 195
.
7
CAUTION
The complete wrist unit weighs 96 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
8
9
10
Secure the wrist unit with a roundsling in an overhead crane.
Unscrew the eight attachment screws securing the wrist unit.
Shown in the figure
Location of wrist unit on page 209
.
Remove the wrist unit from the upper arm by moving it a little back and forth until it is lose.
Note!
Do not damage the cylindrical pin in the process.
Refitting
1
Action
Secure the wrist unit with a roundsling in an overhead crane and lift it to its mounting position.
Note
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
211
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.4.2 Replacement of wrist unit
Continued
2
3
4
5
6
Action
CAUTION
The complete wrist unit weighs 96 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
Put some grease on the surface of the fit.
Check the cylindrical pin.
Fit the wrist with its 8 attachment screws and washers.
Refit the cable harness, axes 5 and 6.
7
8
Standard
Fit the wrist cover.
Foundry Plus
Make sure the wrist cover gasket and the small gasket fitted in the recess of the wrist cover are undamaged. Replace if damaged.
Note
If the pin is damaged replace it.
M12x50 12.9 gleitmo (8 pcs)
Tightening torque: 120 Nm
Detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, upper end on page 195 .
Shown in the figure
Location of wrist unit on page 209
.
9 Foundry Plus
Make sure the washers are fitted in the gasket holes. Refit the wrist cover, Foundry Plus.
xx1400002579
Continues on next page
212
10 Recalibrate the robot.
xx1400002580
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration
Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320
.
General calibration information is included in section
.
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.4.2 Replacement of wrist unit
Continued
11
Action
Refit any equipment previously removed from the wrist unit.
Note
12
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
213
4 Repair
4.4.3 Replacement of the upper arm
4.4.3 Replacement of the upper arm
Location of the upper arm
The upper arm is located on top of the robot as shown in the figure below.
xx0600003057
A
B
C
D
E
F
Motor, axis 3
Gearbox, axis 3
Attachment screws, M12x50 quality 12.9 Gleitmo (20 pcs)
Attachment screws, M16x50 quality 12.9 Gleitmo (16 pcs)
Hole in the lower arm
Upper arm
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Spare part no.
Upper arm (Axes 3-4) See
.
Art. no.
O-ring
Lifting tool 3HAC026597-001
Note
Replace only if damaged.
Instruction 3HAC026600-
002 is enclosed.
Lifting chain
Roundsling
Guiding pins
Hoisting block
Grease
-
-
-
3HAB3537-1
Always use in pairs.
Used to lubricate o-rings.
Continues on next page
214
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.4.3 Replacement of the upper arm
Continued
Equipment, etc.
Standard toolkit
Spare part no.
-
Art. no.
Note
Content is defined in section
.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
Note
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removal
Other tools and procedures may be required.
See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.
The procedure below details how to remove the upper arm.
1
2
Action Note
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Lift away the robot from the track using the lifting and turning tool 3HAC034648-001.
This is detailed in section
Dismantle procedure suspended on page 81 .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
215
4 Repair
4.4.3 Replacement of the upper arm
Continued
Action Note
3
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
4
5
Drain the oil from gearbox axis 3.
Detailed in the section
Raise the upper arm to a position where it is parallel to the floor by releasing the brake of the axis 3 motor.
In order to release the brake of the axis 3 motor, connect the 24 VDC power supply.
Note!
When releasing the brake, the position of the upper arm can change suddenly!
Perform the procedure carefully!
Connect to connector R2.MP3:
• + : pin 2
• -: pin 5
6
CAUTION
The complete upper arm (incl. gearbox axis
3) weighs 282 kg without any additional equipment fitted! Use a suitable lifting device to avoid injury to personnel!
7 Fit the lifting tool on the upper arm as detailed in the enclosed instructions.
Also fit a hoisting block to the front which is used to adjust the balance of the upper arm in order to lift it completely level.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 214 .
8 Remove the cable harness, axes 3-6.
xx0600003102
• A : Lifting tool
• B : Roundsling
• C : Lifting chain
• D : Hoisting block
Detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, upper end on page 195
.
Continues on next page
216
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.4.3 Replacement of the upper arm
Continued
9
Action
Remove the three metal clamps securing the cable harness on the lower arm and armhouse.
Note
Refitting
10
11
12 xx0600003083
• A: Metal clamp, lower arm (2 pcs)
• B: Metal clamp, gearbox axis 3
• C: Metal clamp, armhouse
Remove motor, axis 3.
Remove the attachment screws securing the upper arm to the gearbox axis 3.
Note!
Do not forget to remove the four screws inside the hole in the lower arm.
Remove the complete upper arm and put it on the floor. Let the upper arm lean on its side.
Detailed in the section
Replacement of motor, axis 3 on page 248 .
Shown in the figure
Location of the upper arm on page 214 .
The procedure below details how to refit the upper arm.
1
Action
Make sure the o-ring is fitted to the gearbox.
Lightly lubricate the o-ring with grease.
Note
2
CAUTION
The complete upper arm (incl. gearbox axis
3) weighs 282 kg without any additional equipment fitted! Use a suitable lifting device to avoid injury to personnel!
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
217
4 Repair
4.4.3 Replacement of the upper arm
Continued
3
Action Note
Fit the lifting tool on the upper arm as detailed in the enclosed instructions and lift it to its mounting position.
Also fit a hoisting block to the front which is used to adjust the balance of the upper arm in order to lift it completely level.
Art. number is specified in
Required equipment on page 214
.
6
7
4
5
8
Fit the guiding pins in gearbox axis 3.
Refit the attachment screws securing the upper arm to the gearbox.
Note ! Do not forget the four screws inside the hole in the upper arm.
Shown in the figure
Location of the upper arm on page 214 .
Remove the guiding pins.
Refit motor, axis 3.
Detailed in the section
Replacement of motor, axis 3 on page 248 .
Refit the metal clamps securing the cable harness on the lower arm and armhouse.
xx0600003102
• A : Lifting tool
• B : Roundsling
• C : Lifting chain
• D : Hoisting block
9
10
Perform a leak-down test of the axis-3 gearbox.
Refit the cable harness, axes 3-6.
xx0600003083
• A: Metal clamp, lower arm (2 pcs)
• B: Metal clamp, gearbox axis 3
• C: Metal clamp, armhouse
Detailed in section
Performing a leakdown test on page 178
.
Detailed in section
Replacement of cable harness, upper end on page 195
.
Continues on next page
218 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.4.3 Replacement of the upper arm
Continued
11
12
13
Action
Fill gearbox, axis 3 with oil.
Note
Detailed in section
Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox on page 152
.
Refit the robot to the track using the lifting and turning tool 3HAC034648-001.
Detailed in section
Installation procedure on page 75
Recalibrate the robot.
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
14
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
219
4 Repair
4.4.4 Replacement of lower arm
4.4.4 Replacement of lower arm
Location of lower arm
The location of the lower arm is shown in the figure below.
xx0600003058
C
D
A
B
E
Upper arm
Gearbox, axis 3
Lower arm
Hole in lower arm
Attachment screws, M16x50 quality 12.9 Gleitmo (16 pcs)
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Lower arm
Grease
Lifting tool
Lifting chain
Hoisting block
Roundslings
Guiding pins
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the stepby-step instructions below.
Spare part no.
See
Spare part lists on page 351 .
Art no.
3HAB3537-1
3HAC026597-001
Note
Used to lubricate o-rings.
Instruction 3HAC026600-
002 is enclosed.
-
-
-
-
Always use in pairs.
Content is defined in section
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Continues on next page
220 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.4.4 Replacement of lower arm
Continued
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action Note
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the lower arm.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
221
4 Repair
4.4.4 Replacement of lower arm
Continued
2
Action
Move the robot to the position shown in the figure to the right.
Note xx0900000178
3 Remove the robot from the carriage using the turning and lifting tool.
This is detailed in section
Dismantle procedure suspended on page 81 .
4
DANGER
5
6
7
8
9
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
Remove the cable harness axes 3-6.
Let the cable harness hang loose, without it getting damaged in the proceeded removal procedure.
Remove the upper arm.
Detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, upper end on page 195
.
Detailed in the section
Replacement of the upper arm on page 214
.
Secure the robot in upright position on the transportation plate.
Secure the lower arm with a roundsling in an overhead crane.
Continues on next page
222 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Refitting
4 Repair
4.4.4 Replacement of lower arm
Continued
Action
10
CAUTION
The lower arm weighs 75 kg
(gearboxes axes 2-3 excluded)!
Note
11
12
Remove the attachment screws and washers securing the lower arm to gearbox axis
2.
Shown in the figure
Location of lower arm on page 220 .
Remove the lower arm.
The procedure below details how to refit the lower arm.
1
Action
Secure the lower arm with a roundsling and lift it to its mounting position.
Note
2
CAUTION
The lower arm weighs 75 kg (gearboxes axes
2-3 excluded)!
3
4
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
Make sure the o-ring is fitted to the gearbox.
Lightly lubricate the o-ring with grease.
Fit guiding pins in two of the holes in gearbox axis 2.
Lift the lower arm on to the guiding pins.
Refit the attachment screws and washers securing the lower arm to gearbox axis 2.
Shown in the figure
Location of lower arm on page 220 .
M16x50, quality 12.9 gleitmo (16 pcs).
Tightening torque: 300 Nm.
Remove the guiding pins.
Secure the upper arm with a roundsling and lift it to its mounting position.
Refit the upper arm.
Detailed in the section
Replacement of the upper arm on page 214
.
Refit the robot to the carriage.
Refit the cable harness axes 3-6.
Detailed in the section
Installation procedure on page 75 .
Detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, upper end on page 195
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
223
4 Repair
4.4.4 Replacement of lower arm
Continued
12
Action
Recalibrate the robot.
13
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Note
Pendulum Calibration is described in
Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320
.
General calibration information is included in section
.
224
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.5.1 Replacement of SMB unit
4.5 Frame and base
4.5.1 Replacement of SMB unit
Location of SMB unit
The SMB/BU unit (SMB = serial measurement board, BU = brake release unit) is located on the left-hand side of the frame as shown in the figure below.
The SMB unit and the BU unit are both located inside the SMB/BU box.
H
G
F
I A
B
C
D1
D2
E xx0600003052
F
G
E
F
H
I
J
A
B
C
D1
D2
Attachment screws (4 pcs)
SMB/BU unit
Velcro strap
Battery pack (2-pole battery contact)
Battery pack (3-pole battery contact)
SMB/BU box
Serial measurement unit (SMB), DSQC 633A
Serial measurement unit (SMB), RMU 101
Brake release unit (BU), DSQC 1050
Push button guard
Cover, push button guard
Gasket (Foundry Plus)
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
225
4 Repair
4.5.1 Replacement of SMB unit
Continued
Required equipment
Note
There are different variants of SMB units and batteries. The variant with the
3-pole battery contact has longer lifetime for the battery.
It is important that the SMB unit uses the correct battery. Make sure to order the correct spare parts. Do not replace the battery contact!
Equipment, etc.
Serial measurement unit (SMB)
Spare part no.
Standard toolkit
Circuit diagram
-
Art. no.
Spare part lists on page 351 .
Note
Content is defined in section
See chapter
.
Removal, SMB unit
1
2
The procedure below details how to remove the SMB unit.
Action
Move the robot to the calibration position.
Note
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
3
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)
The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit read the safety information in section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 31
4 Unscrew the attachment screws of the SMB/BU unit and carefully lift it out of its box.
Shown in the figure
Location of SMB unit on page 225
.
CAUTION
Clean cover from metal residues before opening.
Metal residues can cause shortage on the boards which can result in hazardous failures.
Continues on next page
226
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.5.1 Replacement of SMB unit
Continued
5
Action
Carefully disconnect the connectors from the
SMB unit.
Note
Connectors R1.SMB1-3, R1.SMB4-6 and R2.SMB
6 Disconnect the battery cable by pressing down the upper lip of the R1.G connector to release the lock while pulling the connector upwards.
xx0600003054
7 Unscrew the hexagon nuts securing the SMB unit just enough to pull the SMB unit out.
xx1700000993
8 Pull the SMB unit out carefully.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
xx0600003053
• A: Hexagon nut, M5
• B: Tooth lock washer, 6.4 fzb
• C: Hexagon screw, M5x12 quality 8.8
Continues on next page
227
4 Repair
4.5.1 Replacement of SMB unit
Continued
Refitting, SMB unit
The procedure below details how to refit the SMB unit.
1
Action
Push the SMB unit into its tracks and secure it with its hexagon nuts.
Note
2 Reconnect the connectors to the SMB unit.
If cabling is used for 7th axis (option), refit the connector R2.FB7 to the SMB cover and tighten with 6 Nm.
xx0600003053
• A : Hexagon nut, M5
• B : Tooth lock washer, 6.4 fzb
• C : Hexagon screw, M5x12 quality 8.8
xx0600003054
3
4
5
Reconnect the battery cable.
Make sure the lock on the battery cable connector R1.G snaps into place during refitting.
Connector R1.G
Put the SMB/BU unit back into its box and refit the attachment screws.
Shown in the figure
Location of SMB unit on page 225
.
Update the revolution counters!
Detailed in section
Updating revolution counters on page 314 .
Continues on next page
228
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Action
6
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Note
4 Repair
4.5.1 Replacement of SMB unit
Continued
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
229
4 Repair
4.5.2 Replacing the brake release board
4.5.2 Replacing the brake release board
Location of brake release board
The SMB/BU unit (SMB = serial measurement board, BU = brake release unit) is located on the left hand side of the frame as shown in the figure below.
The SMB unit and the BU unit are both located inside the SMB/BU box.
H
G
F
I A
B
C
D1
D2
E xx0600003052
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
I
H
J
Attachment screws (4 pcs)
SMB/BU unit
Velcro strap
Battery pack
SMB/BU box
Serial measurement unit (SMB), DSQC633
Brake release unit (BU), DSQC1050
Push button guard
Cover, push button guard
Gasket (Foundry Plus)
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Brake release board
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-bystep instructions below.
-
Article number Note
3HAC065020-
001
DSQC1050
Content is defined in section
.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Continues on next page
230 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.5.2 Replacing the brake release board
Continued
Removing, brake release board
Use this procedure to remove the brake release board.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
(ESD)
The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit read the safety information in section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 31
3
4
5
6
Remove the cover for the push button guard.
Remove the push button guard from the SMB cover.
Shown in the figure
Location of brake release board on page 230
.
The guard must be removed to ensure a correct refitting of the brake release board.
Take a picture or make notes of how the robot cabling is positioned in regard to the brake release board.
Unscrew the attachment screws of the
SMB/BU unit and carefully lift the unit out of its box.
Let the battery stay connected, to avoid the need of synchronization of the robot!
CAUTION
Clean cover from metal residues before opening.
Metal residues can cause shortage on the boards which can result in hazardous failures.
7 Disconnect the connectors X8, X9 and X10 from the brake release board.
X9
X8
X10 xx1700000978
Location of the brake release unit is shown in the figure
Location of brake release board on page 230
.
Continues on next page
231 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.5.2 Replacing the brake release board
Continued
8
Action
Remove the brake release board from the bracket by removing the four attachment screws.
Note
Refitting, brake release board
Use this procedure to refit the brake release board.
Action Note
1
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)
The unit is sensitive to ESD. Before handling the unit read the safety information in section
The unit is sensitive to ESD on page 31
2 Connect the connectors X8, X9 and X10 to the brake release board.
Be careful not to damage the sockets or pins.
Make sure the connector and its locking arms are snapped down properly.
X9
X8
X10 xx1700000978
3
4
5
Fasten the brake release board on the bracket with the attachment screws.
Make sure the board is positioned as straight as possible on the bracket! The push buttons can otherwise get jammed when the SMB cover is refitted.
Maximum tightening torque: 5 Nm.
Shown in the figure
Location of brake release board on page 230
.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 230
.
Put the SMB/BU unit carefully back into its box and refit its attachment screws.
Verify that the robot cabling is positioned correctly, according to previously taken picture/notes.
WARNING
Screened cables must not get in contact with the brake release board after installation.
Eliminate all risks of contact between screened cables and the brake release board.
6
WARNING
Before continuing any service work, follow the safety procedure in
The brake release buttons may be jammed after service work on page 184 .
7
8
Refit the push button guard to the SMB cover.
Shown in the figure
Location of brake release board on page 230
.
Refit the cover, push button guard .
Continues on next page
232 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.5.2 Replacing the brake release board
Continued
Action Note
9 Press the push buttons 1 to 6, one at a time, to make sure that the buttons are moving freely and do not stay in a locked position.
10 If the battery has been disconnected the revolution counter must be updated.
Detailed in the Calibration chapter section
Updating revolution counters on page 314
.
11
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
233
4 Repair
4.5.3 Replacement of support roller in carriage
4.5.3 Replacement of support roller in carriage
DANGER
Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies before entering the workspace of the manipulator.
Also read the safety sections:
•
Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems on page 33
•
Risks associated with live electric parts on page 29
•
Safety risks during installation and service work on robots on page 23
Location of ball bearings xx0900000440
G
H
E
F
C
D
A
B
Tap screw
Tap
Support roller
Roller holder
Cover
Locking screw
Flange
Screw
Continues on next page
234
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.5.3 Replacement of support roller in carriage
Continued
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Gauge
Adjusting tool
Hexagon socket head screw key
Standard tools
Spare part no.
Removal
Note
1
Action
Remove the pressure from the supporting roller using a overhead crane or a fork lift.
Lifting weight more then 600 kg.
Note
Only necessary if the specific support roller has a supporting function.
WARNING
Do not remove more then one support roller at the time, or the carriage will bee separated from the linear guide.
4
5
6
2
3
Remove the four screws holding the flange.
Remove the locking screw.
Remove the cover.
Remove the complete roller holder.
Remove the tap screw and tap holding the support roller.
If mounted.
Refitting
1
2
Action
Fit a new support roller on to the roller holder.
Refit the complete roller holder.
Note
3
4
5
Adjust the support roller using a gauge.
Refit the cover.
Refit the flange using the four screws.
Torque data for roller holder
Roller holder size
BR 40
BR 52
BR 62
BR 72
BR 90
Torque data
87
120
220
220
450
Adjust the roller holder maximal open and lock it temporary using the locking screw.
235 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.1 Replacement of motor, axis 1
4.6 Motors
4.6.1 Replacement of motor, axis 1
Note
This procedure requires calibration of the robot.
The robot is calibrated by either Calibration Pendulum or Axis Calibration at factory. Always use the same calibration method as used at the factory.
Information about valid calibration method is found on the calibration label or in the calibration menu on the FlexPendant.
Location of motor
The motor axis 1 is located as shown in the figure below.
xx0900000216
Continues on next page
236
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.6.1 Replacement of motor, axis 1
Continued
A
B
C
AC Motor, axis 1
Cover attachment screws
Cover for R1.MP1 and R1.FB 1.
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Motor, axis 1
O-ring
Mobilux EP 2
Grease
Removal tool, motor M12x
Power supply
Lifting accessories for motor -
Standard toolkit -
-
-
Art. no.
See
.
21522012-430
Note
NOTE! Pinion not used.
3HAB3537-1
3HAC14973-1
Must be replaced when reassemling the motor.
Used to lubricate the motor clutch.
Used to lubricate the o-ring.
Always use the removal tools in pairs!
24 VDC, max. 1,5 A
For releasing the brakes.
Calibration Pendulum toolkit
Calibration tool box, Axis Calibration
3HAC15716-1
3HAC055412-001
Content is defined in section
Complete kit that also includes operating manual.
Required if Calibration Pendulum is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See chapter
Required documents
Document
Service manual - Gearbox unit
HPG (Güdel)
Operating manual - Toploader
(Güdel)
Document number Note
18014398746814859-
-001
Valid for multi-tooth coupling.
Always download latest version from http://www.gudel.com.
546181387--001 Valid for elastomer coupling.
Found on myABB business portal
( www.myportal.abb.com
).
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
237
4 Repair
4.6.1 Replacement of motor, axis 1
Continued
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action Note
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removing, axis-1 motor
Use the procedures below to remove the axis-1 motor.
Preparations before removing the motor
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
3 Remove the cover for connector access on top of the motor by unscrewing its four attachment screws.
Continues on next page
238
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.6.1 Replacement of motor, axis 1
Continued
4
Action
Remove the cable gland cover at the cable exit by unscrewing its two attachment screws.
Note
Note
Make sure the gasket is not damaged!
5
6
Disconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover.
Use a forklift and a loading pallet to secure the motor from falling.
xx0200000199
• A: Cable gland cover
Removing the motor and coupling
Action
1
CAUTION
The motor weighs 25 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
Note
2
3
Remove the motor without damaging the coupling as detailed in the service manual for the gearbox.
Following is only additional information to the procedure given in the gearbox service manual.
• Use the removal tools in the motor attachment screw holes to press out the motor, if required.
For multi-tooth coupling, see Service manual - Gearbox unit HPG
(Güdel) .
For elastomer coupling, see Operating manual - Toploader (Güdel) .
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 237
.
Always use the removal tools in pairs!
If the motor is to be replaced with a new spare part, move the coupling to the new motor as detailed in the gearbox service manual.
For multi-tooth coupling, see Service manual - Gearbox unit HPG
(Güdel) .
For elastomer coupling, see Operating manual - Toploader (Güdel) .
Adjusting the coupling on the motor
How to position and adjust the coupling on the motor shaft, is detailed in the service manual for the gearbox.
For multi-tooth coupling, see Service manual - Gearbox unit HPG (Güdel) .
For elastomer coupling, see Operating manual - Toploader (Güdel) .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
239
4 Repair
4.6.1 Replacement of motor, axis 1
Continued
Refitting, axis-1 motor
Use the procedure below to refit the axis-1 motor.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all electric power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot!
2
CAUTION
The motor weighs 25 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
3
4
5
Position, adjust and lubricate the coupling on the motor.
Install the motor as detailed in the service manual for the gearbox.
Following is only additional information to the procedure given in the gearbox service manual.
• Fasten all motor attachment screws crosswise. Tightening torque 26 Nm.
For multi-tooth coupling, see Service manual - Gearbox unit HPG
(Güdel) .
For elastomer coupling, see Operating manual - Toploader (Güdel) .
Recalibrate the robot.
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration
Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320
.
General calibration information is included in section
.
240
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.6.2 Replacement of motor axis 2
4.6.2 Replacement of motor axis 2
Location of motor
The motor, axis 2, is located on the left-hand side of the robot as shown in the figure below.
xx0900000190
C
D
A
B
Motor, axis 2
Motor attachment holes (4 pcs)
R2.FB2
R2.MP2
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Motor including pinion
Spare part no.
See
Spare part lists on page 351 .
O-ring 21522012-430
Art. no.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Note
Must be replaced when reassembling motor!
Continues on next page
241
4 Repair
4.6.2 Replacement of motor axis 2
Continued
Equipment, etc.
Grease
Removal tool, motor
M12x
Guide pins M10 x 150
Spare part no.
Extension bar, 300 mm for bits 1/2"
Power supply
Rotation tool
Standard toolkit
Calibration Pendulum toolkit
Calibration tool box,
Axis Calibration
Art. no.
3HAB3537-1
3HAC15521-2
Note
For lubricating the o-ring.
Always use the removal tools in pairs!
For guiding the motor.
Guides are to be used in pairs!
3HAC12342-1
-
-
3HAC17105-1
3HAC15716-1
3HAC055412-001
24 VDC, 1.5 A
For releasing the brakes.
Used to rotate the motor pinion when mating it to the gear when brakes are released with 24VDC power supply.
Content is defined in section
Complete kit that also includes operating manual.
Required if Calibration Pendulum is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the stepby-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See chapter
.
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
Note
Continues on next page
242 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.2 Replacement of motor axis 2
Continued
Action Note
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removal, motor
The procedure below details how to remove the motor, axis 2.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
243
4 Repair
4.6.2 Replacement of motor axis 2
Continued
2
Action Note
1) Move the robot to a position close enough to the position showed in the figure.
The robot will extracted as shown in the figure.
DANGER
2) Clear the area before releasing the brakes, the robot is going to collapse.
3) Release the brakes for axis 2-6, releasing brakes are detailed in the section
Manually releasing the brakes on page 95
.
xx0900000191
3
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
4
5
6
Drain the oil from gearbox, axis 2.
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-2 gearbox on page 149 .
Remove the cover on top of the motor by unscrewing its four attachment screws.
Remove the cable gland cover at the cable exit by unscrewing its two attachment screws.
Shown in the figure
Location of motor on page 241 .
Make sure the gasket is not damaged!
Continues on next page
244 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
7
8
Action
Disconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover.
Use a fork lift to place a loading pallet below (approx. 3mm) the motor as in the figure.
Note
CAUTION
Do not lift the motor in this state, the risk of damage the motor is immediate.
4 Repair
4.6.2 Replacement of motor axis 2
Continued xx0900000192
9 Remove the motor by unscrewing its four attachment screws and plain washers.
10 Fit the two guide pins in two of the motor attachment holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 241 .
Shown in the figure
Location of motor on page 241 .
11 If required, press the motor out of position by fitting the removal tool, motor to the remaining motor attachment holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 241 .
Shown in the figure
Always use the removal tools in pairs!
12
CAUTION
The motor weighs 38 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
13 Lift the motor to get the pinion away from the gear.
Make sure the motor pinion does not get damaged!
14 Remove the motor by gently pulling it onto the loading pallet.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
245
4 Repair
4.6.2 Replacement of motor axis 2
Continued
Refitting, motor
The procedure below details how to refit the motor axis 2.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2
3
4
Make sure the o-ring on the circumference of the motor is seated properly. Lightly lubricate the o-ring with grease.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 241
.
In order to release the brake, remove the cover on top of the motor and connect the 24
VDC power supply.
Connect to connector R2.MP2
• +: pin 2
• -: pin 5
Fit the two guide pins in the two lower motor attachment holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 241
.
Shown in the figure
.
5
6
7
CAUTION
The motor weighs 38 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
Lift the motor and guide it onto the guide pins, as close to the correct position as possible without pushing the motor pinion into the gear.
Make sure that the motor is turned the right direction, that is the cables facing .
Use the rotation tool in order to rotate the motor pinion when mating it to the gear (see the figure to the right). Fit the motor, making sure the motor pinion is properly mated to the gear of gearbox axis 2 and that it does not get damaged.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 241
.
8 Remove the guide pins.
Continues on next page
246
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
xx0200000165
The rotation tool is used beneath the motor cover, directly on the motor shaft as shown in the figure above.
• A: Rotation tool
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.6.2 Replacement of motor axis 2
Continued
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Action Note
Secure the motor with four attachment screws and plain washers.
M10 x 40, tightening torque: 50 Nm.
Reused screws may be used, providing they are lubricated as detailed in section
before fitting.
Disconnect the brake release voltage.
Reconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover.
Connect in accordance with markings on connectors.
Refit the cable gland cover with its two attachment screws.
Refit the cover on top of the motor with its four attachment screws.
Perform a leak down test.
at the cable exit Shown in the figure
.
Make sure the cover is tightly sealed!
Detailed in
Performing a leak-down test on page 178
.
Refill the gearbox with oil.
Recalibrate the robot.
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-2 gearbox on page 149 .
Pendulum Calibration is described in
Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
17
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
247
4 Repair
4.6.3 Replacement of motor, axis 3
4.6.3 Replacement of motor, axis 3
Location of motor
The motor axis 3 is located on the left hand side of the robot as shown in the figure below.
xx0600003051
A
B
C
Cable gland cover, motor axis 3
Motor attachment holes (4 pcs)
Motor, axis 3
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Motor, axis 3
Spare part no.
See
.
Art. no.
O-ring
Grease
Bolts M16x60
(for mechanical stop axis 3)
Guide pins M10 x
100
Guide pins M10 x
150
Rotation tool
21522012-430
3HAB3537-1
3HAB3409-86
Note
Includes:
• motor
• pinion
• o-ring 21522012-430
Must be replaced when reassembling motor!
For lubricating the o-ring.
3HAC15521-1
3HAC15521-2
3HAC17105-1
For guiding the motor.
For guiding the motor.
Used to rotate the motor pinion when mating it to the gear when brakes are released with
24 VDC power supply.
Continues on next page
248 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.3 Replacement of motor, axis 3
Continued
Equipment, etc.
Power supply
Spare part no.
Standard toolkit
Calibration Pendulum toolkit
Calibration tool box, Axis Calibration
-
-
Art. no.
Note
24 VDC, max. 1.5 A
For releasing the brakes.
Content is defined in section
3HAC15716-1
3HAC055412-001
Complete kit that also includes operating manual.
Required if Calibration Pendulum is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See chapter
.
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
Note
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
249
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.3 Replacement of motor, axis 3
Continued
Removal, motor
The procedure below details how to remove motor, axis 3.
1
2
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
Move the robot to the position shown in the figure.
This is done in order to drain all oil from the gearbox axis 3.
xx0900000197
3 Drain the oil from gearbox axis 3.
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox on page 152 .
4
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
5
6
Remove any equipment hindering access to motor axis 3.
Remove the cover on top of the motor by unscrewing its four attachment screws.
Continues on next page
250 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.3 Replacement of motor, axis 3
Continued
7
8
Action Note
Remove the cable gland cover at the cable exit by unscrewing its two securing screws.
Shown in the figure
Location of motor on page 248 .
Make sure the gasket is not damaged!
Disconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover.
9 Unscrew the motors four attachment screws and plain washers .
Shown in the figure
Location of motor on page 248 .
10 Fit the two guide pins in two of the motor attachment screw holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 248 .
11 Press the motor out of position by fitting removal tool, motor to the remaining motor attachment screw holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 248 .
Always use the removal tools in pairs!
12 Apply the lifting tool, motor axis 2
,3, 4 to the motor.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 248 .
xx0900000196
13
CAUTION
The motor weighs 25 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
14 Lift the motor to get the pinion away from the gear.
15 Remove the motor by gently lifting it straight out and disconnect the brake release voltage.
Make sure the motor pinion is not damaged!
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
251
4 Repair
4.6.3 Replacement of motor, axis 3
Continued
Refitting, motor
The procedure below details how to refit motor, axis 3.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2
3
4
Make sure the o-ring on the circumference of the motor is seated properly. Lightly lubricate it with grease .
Art no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 248
.
Fit the lifting tool, motor axis 2, 3, 4 to the motor.
Art no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 248
.
Fit the two guide pins in the two lower motor attachment holes.
Art no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 248
.
Shown in the figure
5
CAUTION
The motor weighs 25 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
6
7
8
Lift the motor and guide it onto the guide pins, as close to the correct position as possible without pushing the motor pinion into the gear.
Remove the lifting tool and allow the motor to stay on the guide pins.
In order to release the brake, connect the 24 VDC power supply.
Connect to connector R2.MP3
• +: pin 2
• -: pin 5
Continues on next page
252
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.6.3 Replacement of motor, axis 3
Continued
9
Action Note
Use the rotation tool in order to rotate the motor pinion when mating it to the gear!
Fit the motor, making sure the motor pinion is properly mated to the gear of gearbox, axis 3.
Art no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 248
.
Make sure the motor pinion does not get damaged!
Make sure the motor is turned the right direction, that is the cables facing forwards.
10
11
12
13
14 xx0200000165
The rotation tool is used beneath the motor cover, directly on the motor shaft as shown in figure above.
• A: Rotation tool.
Remove the guide pins.
Secure the motor with four attachment screws and plain washers.
4 pcs: M10 x 40, tightening torque:
50 Nm.
Disconnect the brake release voltage.
Reconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover.
Connect in accordance with markings on connectors.
Refit the cable gland cover at the cable exit with its two attachment screws.
Make sure the cover is tightly sealed!
Shown in the figure
.
15
16
17
18
19
Refit the cover on top of the motor with its four attachment screws.
Remove the equipment used to unload the upper arm.
Make sure the cover is tightly sealed!
Perform a leak-down test.
Detailed in the section
Performing a leak-down test on page 178
.
Refill the gearbox with oil.
Recalibrate the robot!
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox on page 152
.
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration
Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320
.
General calibration information is included in section
.
Continues on next page
253 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.3 Replacement of motor, axis 3
Continued
Action
20
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Note
254
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.6.4 Replacement of motor, axis 4
4.6.4 Replacement of motor, axis 4
Location of motor
The motor axis 4 is located on the left-hand side of the upper arm as shown in the figure below.
xx0600003050
A
B
C
Cable gland cover, motor axis 4
Motor, axis 4
Motor attachment holes (4 pcs)
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Motor including pinion
O-ring
Grease
Loctite 574, Flange sealant
Guide pins M8 x 100
Guide pins M8 x 150
Rotation tool
Power supply
Standard toolkit
-
-
Art. no.
Note
See spare part number in
.
Includes:
• motor
• pinion
• o-ring 21522012-430
21522012-430
3HAB3537-1
12340011-116
Must be replaced when reassembling motor!
Used to lubricate the o-ring.
Option Foundry Plus
3HAC15520-1
3HAC15520-2
3HAC17105-1
For guiding the motor.
For guiding the motor.
Used to rotate the motor pinion when mating it to the gear when brakes are released with 24 VDC power supply.
24 VDC, max. 1,5 A
For releasing the brakes.
Content is defined in section
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
255
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.4 Replacement of motor, axis 4
Continued
Equipment, etc.
Calibration Pendulum toolkit
Art. no.
3HAC15716-1
Calibration tool box, Axis Calibration
3HAC055412-001
Note
Complete kit that also includes operating manual.
Required if Calibration Pendulum is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-bystep instructions below.
Circuit diagram 3HAC024090-001 See chapter
.
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action Note
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removal, motor axis 4
The procedure below details how to remove the motor, axis 4.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
Continues on next page
256 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.4 Replacement of motor, axis 4
Continued
Action Note
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
3
4
5
6
7
Remove the cable gland cover at the cable exit of the motor by unscrewing its two attachment screws.
Shown in the figure
.
Make sure the gasket is not damaged!
Remove the cover on top of the motor by unscrewing its four attachment screws.
Disconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover.
In order to release the brake, connect the
24 VDC power supply.
Connect to connector R2.MP4
• +: pin 2
• -: pin 5
Unscrew the motors four attachment screws and plain washers.
Shown in the figure
.
8
9
Fit the two guide pins in two of the motor attachment screw holes.
If required, press the motor out of position by fitting removal tool, motor to the motor attachment screw holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 255 .
Always use the removal tools in pairs!
10 Lift the motor to get the pinion away from the gear and disconnect the brake release voltage.
11 Remove the motor by gently lifting it straight out.
Make sure the motor pinion is not damaged!
Refitting, motor axis 4
The procedure below details how to refit motor, axis 4.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2
3
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Make sure the o-ring on the circumference of the motor is seated properly. Lightly lubricate the o-ring with grease.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 255
.
In order to release the brakes, connect the
24 VDC power supply.
Connect to connector R2.MP4:
• +: pin 2
• -: pin 5
Continues on next page
257
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.4 Replacement of motor, axis 4
Continued
4
5
6
Action
Fit the two guide pins in two of the motor attachment holes.
Note
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 255
.
Shown in the figure
Location of motor on page 255 .
Fit the motor with guidance of the pins, making sure the motor pinion is properly mated to the gear of gearbox 4.
Make sure the motor pinion does not get damaged!
Use the rotation tool in order to rotate the motor pinion when mating it to the gear!
Fit the motor, making sure the motor pinion is properly mated to the gear, axis 4.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 255
.
Make sure the motor pinion does not get damaged!
Make sure the motor is turned the right direction, that is the cables facing forwards.
7
8
9
10
11
12 xx0200000165
The rotation tool is used beneath the motor cover, directly on the motor shaft as shown in figure above.
• A: Rotation tool.
Remove the guide pins.
Secure the motor with four attachment screws and plain washers.
Disconnect the brake release voltage.
Reconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover.
Refit the cover on top of the motor with its four attachment screws.
Make sure the cover is tightly sealed!
Refit the cable gland cover at the cable exit with its two attachment screws.
Shown in the figure
Location of motor on page 255 .
13
14
15
Perform a leak-down test if the gearbox has been drained.
Detailed in the section
Performing a leakdown test on page 178
.
Refill the gearbox with oil if drained.
Recalibrate the robot!
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
.
Continues on next page
258 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Action
16
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26
.
Note
4 Repair
4.6.4 Replacement of motor, axis 4
Continued
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
259
4 Repair
4.6.5 Replacement of motor, axis 5 , IRB 6620/6620LX
4.6.5 Replacement of motor, axis 5 , IRB 6620/6620LX
Location of motor
The motor axis 5 is located inside the upper arm tube, but attached to the wrist unit, as shown in the figure below.
A more detailed view of the component and its position may be found in
Spare part lists on page 351 .
xx0600003049
C
D
E
A
B
Cable harness
Motor, axis 5
Attachment screws (4 pcs)
Metal clamp
Cover, cable gland
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Motor
Retrofit set Foundry Plus, wrist
For spare part number, see
.
Retrofit set Foundry Plus, upper arm axis 4
For spare part number, see
.
O-ring 21522012-430
Grease
Loctite 574, Flange sealant
Art. no.
For spare part number, see
.
Note
3HAB3537-1
12340011-116
Must be replaced when reassembling motor!
For lubricating the o-ring.
Option Foundry Plus
Continues on next page
260 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.5 Replacement of motor, axis 5 , IRB 6620/6620LX
Continued
Equipment, etc.
Art. no.
Removal tool, motor M10x 3HAC14972-1
Extension bar 300 mm for bits 1/2"
3HAC12342-1
Guide pins M8 x 100
Guide pins M8 x 150
Power supply
3HAC15520-1
-
3HAC15520-2
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram -
-
Note
Always use the removal tools in pairs!
For guiding the motor.
For guiding the motor.
24 VDC, 1.5 A
For releasing the brakes.
Content is defined in section
.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
See chapter
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
Note
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
261
4 Repair
4.6.5 Replacement of motor, axis 5 , IRB 6620/6620LX
Continued
Removal, motor, axis 5
The procedure below details how to remove motor, axis 5.
1
2
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
Move the robot to a position where the upper arm is parallel to the floor and the side of the wrist unit, where motor axis 5 is placed, is facing up.
3
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
4 Remove the cover on the wrist unit by removing its attachment screws.
Note
Make sure not to lose the washers placed in the holes of the foundry gasket.
xx1400002580
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Remove the metal clamp securing the cable harness.
Shown in the figure in section
Location of motor on page 260 .
Remove the cable gland cover at the cable exit by unscrewing its two attachment screws.
Shown in the figure in section
Location of motor on page 260 .
Remove the cover on top of the motor by unscrewing its four attachment screws.
Disconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover and remove the cable of the axis-5 motor.
Pull the cable harness out of the upper arm a little, far enough to make room for removal of the motor.
Shown in the figure in the section
Location of motor on page 260 .
In order to release the brake, connect the 24 VDC power supply.
Connect to:
- connector R2.MP5 (in the motor):
• + : pin 2
• -: pin 5
Remove the motor by unscrewing its four attachment screws and plain washers.
Fit the two guide pins in two of the motor attachment screw holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 260 .
Continues on next page
262 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.5 Replacement of motor, axis 5 , IRB 6620/6620LX
Continued
13
14
15
Action Note
If required, press the motor out of position by fitting removal tool, motor, M10 to the motor attachment screw holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 260 .
Always use the removal tools in pairs and diagonally!
Lift the motor to get the pinion away from the gear and disconnect the brake release voltage.
Make sure the motor pinion is not damaged!
Remove the motor by gently lifting it straight out.
Keep track of the shims between the motor flange and the wrist housing.
Refitting, motor, axis 5
The procedure below details how to refit motor, axis 5.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Make sure the o-ring on the circumference of the motor is seated properly. Lightly lubricate the o-ring with grease.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 260 .
In order to release the brake, connect the 24
VDC power supply.
Connect to:
- connector R2.MP5 (in the motor):
• + : pin 2
• -: pin 5
Fit the two guide pins in two of the motor attachment holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 260 .
Fit the motor, with guidance from the pins, making sure the motor pinion is properly mated to the gear of axis 5.
Make sure the motor pinion does not get damaged!
Secure the motor with four attachment screws and plain washers.
4 pcs: M8 x 25; tightening torque: 24
Nm.
Disconnect the brake release voltage.
Refit the cable of the axis-5 motor and reconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover.
Refit the cover on top of the motor with its four attachment screws.
Refit the cable gland cover at the cable exit with its two attachment screws.
Make sure the cover is tightly sealed!
Refit the metal clamp securing the cable harness.
Shown in the figure in the section
.
Perform a leak-down test.
Detailed in the section
Performing a leak-down test on page 178
.
13 Standard
Refit the cover of the wrist unit with its attachment screws.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
263
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.5 Replacement of motor, axis 5 , IRB 6620/6620LX
Continued
14
Action
Foundry Plus
Make sure that the gasket is undamaged. Also the small gasket fitted in the cover recess.
Replace if damaged.
Note
15 Foundry Plus
Make sure the washers are fitted in the gasket holes. Refit the cover, wrist unit Foundry Plus.
xx1400002579
264 xx1400002580
16
17
Refill the gear with oil.
Re-calibrate the robot.
18
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-5 gearbox on page 158
.
Pendulum Calibration is described in
Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.6.6 Replacement of motor, axis 6
4.6.6 Replacement of motor, axis 6
Location of motor
The motor axis 6 is located in the center of the wrist unit as shown in the figure below.
xx0600003039
A
B
Wrist unit
Motor, axis 6
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Motor including pinion
Motor including pinion
(Foundry Plus)
Spare part no.
See spare part number in
.
Motor including pinion
(insulated)
See spare part number in
.
Art. no.
O-ring 21522012-430
Gasket
Gasket, cover
3HAC048560-001
3HAC033489-001
Note
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Includes:
• motor
• pinion
• o-ring 21522012-430
Must be replaced when reassembling motor!
Must be replaced when replacing motor
Must be replaced when opening cover.
Continues on next page
265
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.6 Replacement of motor, axis 6
Continued
Equipment, etc.
Removal tool, motor
M10x
Extension bar 300 mm for bits 1/2"
Guide pins M8 x 100
Guide pins M8 x 150
Power supply
Spare part no.
Grease
Loctite 574, Flange sealant
Standard toolkit
Calibration Pendulum toolkit
Calibration tool box,
Axis Calibration
Art. no.
3HAC14972-1
Note
Always use the removal tools in pairs!
3HAC12342-1
-
3HAC15520-1
3HAC15520-2
3HAB3537-1
12340011-116
For guiding the motor.
For guiding the motor.
24 VDC, 1.5 A
For releasing the brakes.
For lubricating the o-ring.
Option Foundry Plus
-
3HAC15716-1
3HAC055412-
001
Content is defined in section
.
Complete kit that also includes operating manual.
Required if Calibration Pendulum is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Other tools and procedures may be required.
See references to these procedures in the stepby-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See chapter
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
Note
Continues on next page
266
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.6.6 Replacement of motor, axis 6
Continued
Action Note
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removal, motor
The procedure below details how to remove the motor, axis 6.
Note
Robots with protection type Foundry Plus or Foundry Prime require special repair routines to maintain the tightness level, in addition to the procedure below, described in
Replacement of the motor axis 6 (Foundry Plus) on page 270 .
1
2
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Move the robot to a position where the motor in axis 6 is pointed straight up. This position enables the motor to be replaced without draining the gear oil, which in turn saves time.
Note
3
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
4
5
6
Remove the rear motor cover by unscrewing the five attachment screws.
Disconnect all connectors beneath the cover.
In order to release the brake, connect the 24 VDC power supply.
Connect to connector R3.MP6
• +: pin 2
• -: pin 5
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
267
4 Repair
4.6.6 Replacement of motor, axis 6
Continued
7
Action
Remove the motor by unscrewing its four attachment screws and plain washers.
Note
8 xx0600003038
• A: Tilthouse
• B: Motor, axis 6
• C: Attachment screws (4 pcs)
If required, press the motor out of position by fitting removal tool, motor to the motor attachment screw holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 265
.
Always use the removal tools in pairs!
9 Lift the motor carefully to get the pinion away from the gear and disconnect the brake release voltage.
Make sure the motor pinion is not damaged!
10 Remove the motor by gently lifting it straight out.
Refitting, motor
The procedure below details how to refit motor, axis 6.
Note
Robots with protection type Foundry Plus or Foundry Prime require special repair routines to maintain the tightness level, in addition to the procedure below, described in
Replacement of the motor axis 6 (Foundry Plus) on page 270 .
1
2
Action
Make sure the o-ring on the circumference of the motor is seated properly. Lightly lubricate the o-ring with grease.
In order to release the brake, connect the 24
VDC power supply.
Note
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 265 .
Connect to connector R3.MP6
• +: pin 2
• -: pin 5
Continues on next page
268 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.6 Replacement of motor, axis 6
Continued
3
4
Action Note
Fit the two guide pins in two of the motor attachment holes.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 265 .
Fit the motor, with guidance from the pins, making sure the motor pinion is properly mated to the gear of gearbox, axis 6.
Make sure the pinion on the motor shaft is not damaged!
5
6
7
8
9
10 xx0600003038
• A: Tilthouse
• B: Motor, axis 6
• C: Attachment screws
Remove the guide pins.
Secure the motor with its four attachment screws and plain washers.
4 pcs: M8 x 25, tightening torque: 24
Nm.
Disconnect the brake release voltage.
Reconnect all connectors beneath the motor cover.
Refit the cover on top of the motor with its five attachment screws.
Re-calibrate the robot.
Make sure the cover is tightly sealed!
Pendulum Calibration is described in
Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320
.
General calibration information is included in section
Continues on next page
269 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.6 Replacement of motor, axis 6
Continued
Action
11
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Note
Replacement of the motor axis 6 (Foundry Plus)
Robots with protection type Foundry Plus require special repair routines to maintain the tightness level.
The repair must be done according to the previous repair procedure with the following additions.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2 Remove the rear motor cover by unscrewing the five attachment screws.
3 Continue to remove the motor unit, according to step 6 and forwards in
.
xx1500002524
• A: Motor unit
• B: Connection box
• C: Attachment screw (5 pcs)
• D: Rear motor cover
• E: Gasket
Continues on next page
270 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.6.6 Replacement of motor, axis 6
Continued
Action
4
Note
Keep the old rear motor cover with the air nipple.
5 Remove the protection strip on the gasket and mount it on the motor .
Note
6
7
Apply Mercasol 3106 on the motor end cover .
Apply Loctite 574 flange sealant on the contact surface.
xx1500002425
• A: Attachment screw (4pcs)
Mercasol 3106
• B: Motor unit
• C: O-ring
• D: Sikaflex in screw recesses
• E: Tilt house
• F: Washer
• G: Rear motor cover
• H: Sealing
• J: Loctite 574
8
9
Apply grease on the o-ring on the motor .
Continue to refit the new motor according to section,
.
xx1400000992
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
271
4 Repair
4.7.1 Replacement of gearbox 1
4.7 Gearboxes
4.7.1 Replacement of gearbox 1
Location of gearbox 1
Depending on if the gear unit is equipped with a multi-tooth coupling or an elastomer coupling, the appearance and replacement procedure of the gear unit differs. The differences are pointed out in the section.
Gearbox with multi-tooth coupling xx0900000210
F
G
D
E
A
B
C
Gearbox axis 1
Attachment screws gearbox
AC motor
Attachment screws motor
Flank
Clutch locking screw
Clutch
Continues on next page
272
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Gearbox with elastomer coupling
A
B
F
4 Repair
4.7.1 Replacement of gearbox 1
Continued
D
C
E xx1800000563
A
B
C
D
E
F
Gearbox axis 1
Plug
AC motor
Attachment screws motor
Coupling screw
Coupling
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Dial indicator
Brush
Mobilux EP 2
Lifting accessories for gearbox -
Standard tools -
-
-
-
Art. no.
Required documents
Document
Service manual - Gearbox unit
HPG (Güdel)
Operating manual - Toploader
(Güdel)
Note
Used to lubricate the motor clutch.
Document number Note
18014398746814859-
-001
Valid for multi-tooth coupling.
Always download latest version from http://www.gudel.com.
546181387--001 Valid for elastomer coupling.
Found on myABB business portal
( www.myportal.abb.com
).
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
273
4 Repair
4.7.1 Replacement of gearbox 1
Continued
Removing the gearbox
1
Action
Move carriage to the zero position, and use a dial indicator to make sure that the carriage remains in position when refitting the gearbox.
Note xx1400000773
2
DANGER
Turn off all electric power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot!
3 Remove the motor.
See
Replacement of motor, axis 1 on page 236
.
CAUTION
Do not alter the clutch position on the motor shaft.
4 Remove the gearbox unit as detailed in the service manual for the gearbox.
For multi-tooth coupling, see Service manual - Gearbox unit HPG (Güdel) .
For elastomer coupling, see Operating manual - Toploader (Güdel) .
Refitting the gearbox
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all electric power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot!
2
3
4
Refit the gearbox to the carriage as detailed in the service manual for the gearbox.
For multi-tooth coupling, see Service manual - Gearbox unit HPG (Güdel) .
For elastomer coupling, see Operating manual - Toploader (Güdel) .
Refit the motor.
Recalibrate the robot.
See
Replacement of motor, axis 1 on page 236
.
Described in the section
Updating revolution counters on page 314
Continues on next page
274
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.7.1 Replacement of gearbox 1
Continued
5
Action
Set the tooth flank backlash.
Note
For multi-tooth coupling, see Operating manual - TM-O Sizes 40-90 (Güdel) or Operating manual - TM-O 1-4 (Güdel) (depending on production year).
For elastomer coupling, see Operating manual - Toploader (Güdel) .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
275
4 Repair
4.7.2 Replacement gearbox axis 2
4.7.2 Replacement gearbox axis 2
Location of gearbox axis 2
The gearbox axis 2 is located in the lower arm rotational center.
xx0600003056
C
D
A
B
Attachment screws, M12x60 quality 12.9 Gleitmo (24 pcs)
Attachment screws, M16x50 quality 12.9 Gleitmo (16 pcs)
Motor, axis 2
Gearbox, axis 2
Required equipment
Equipment, etc
Gearbox, axis 2
Spare part no.
See Spare parts
Art. no.
Note
Includes:
• gearbox
• o-ring
O-ring (339.3x5.7)
Grease
Lifting tool
3HAB3772-91
Lifting tool
Roundsling
Guide pins (M12x250)
Guide pins (M12x200)
Crank
Standard toolkit -
3HAB3537-1
3HAC026597-001
For lubricating o-rings.
Instruction
3HAC026600-002 is enclosed.
For lifting gearbox
-
3HAC025214-001
3HAC13056-4
3HAC13056-3
3HAC020999-001
Always use in pairs.
Always use in pairs.
Used to turn the gear in correct position.
Content is defined in section
.
Continues on next page
276
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.7.2 Replacement gearbox axis 2
Continued
Art. no.
Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action Note
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removal
Equipment, etc
Other tools and procedures may be required.
See references to these procedures in the stepby-step instructions below.
Spare part no.
The procedure below details how to remove gearbox axis 2.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
277
4 Repair
4.7.2 Replacement gearbox axis 2
Continued
2
Action
Jog the robot to the position shown in the figure to the right.
Note xx0900000178
3
CAUTION
The upper and lower arms (incl.
gearboxes axes 2 and 3) weighs
455 kg. All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
4
5
Remove the robot from the carriage.
Described in the section
Lifting the robot with lifting and turning tool on page 74 .
Drain the oil from gearbox axis 2.
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-2 gearbox on page 149 .
6
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
7
8
Remove the cable harness, axes
1-3.
Detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2) on page 189 .
Let the removed part of the cable harness hang loose and take care not to damage it during the removal process.
Continues on next page
278 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.7.2 Replacement gearbox axis 2
Continued
9
10
11
Action Note
Remove the attachment screws
M16x50 (16 pcs) that secure the lower arm to gearbox axis 2.
Remove the upper and lower arms and put them down on the floor.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox axis 2 on page 276
.
Remove motor axis 2.
Detailed in the section
12
13
Remove two attachment screws
(M12x60) parallel to each other.
Fit two guide pins in the holes, parallel to each other.
14
CAUTION
The gearbox weighs 98 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
15 Fit the lifting tool for lifting the gearbox in the uppermost hole and secure it with a roundsling.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 276
.
16
17
18 xx0900000114
The figure shows IRB6640.
Remove the attachment screws
M12x60 (24 pcs) securing the gearbox to the frame.
Remove the gearbox and put it in a place where it will not/cannot be damaged.
Wipe away residual oil and paint.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox axis 2 on page 276
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
279
4 Repair
4.7.2 Replacement gearbox axis 2
Continued
Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit gearbox axis 2.
1
Action
Make sure the o-ring is fitted to the gearbox. Lightly lubricate it with grease.
Note xx0600003128
• A : O-ring 3HAB3772-91
2
CAUTION
The gearbox weighs 98 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
3 Fit the lifting tool for lifting the gearbox in the uppermost hole of the gearbox and secure it with a roundsling.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 276 .
4 Fit two guide pins in two of the attachment holes, parallel to each other.
xx0900000114
The figure shows IRB6640.
Continues on next page
280
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.7.2 Replacement gearbox axis 2
Continued
5
6
Action Note
Lift the gearbox on to the guide pins and push it in mounting position.
Refit the gearbox with its attachment screws.
M12x60 (24 pcs)
Tightening torque: 120 Nm.
7
CAUTION
The upper and lower arms (incl. gearboxes axes 2 and 3) weighs 455 kg. All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
8
9
Use a crank in the gearbox in order to find the holes for the attachment screws.
Refit the lower arm to the gearbox axis 2 with its attachment screws.
M16x50 (16 pcs)
Tightening torque: 300 Nm.
10
11
12
13
Refit motor axis 2.
Refit the cable harness, axes
1-3.
Detailed in the section
Replacement of motor axis 2 on page 241 .
Detailed in the section
Replacement of cable harness, lower end (axes 1-2) on page 189 .
Fill the gearbox axis 2 with oil.
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-2 gearbox on page 149 .
Recalibrate the robot.
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
.
14
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
281
4 Repair
4.7.3 Replacement of gearbox axis 3
4.7.3 Replacement of gearbox axis 3
Location of gearbox axis 3
The gearbox axis 3 is located in the upper arm rotational center.
xx0600003057
C
D
A
B
E
Motor, axis 3
Gearbox, axis 3
Attachment screws, M12x50 quality 12.9 gleitmo (20 pcs)
Attachment screws, M16x50 quality 12.9 gleitmo (16 pcs)
Hole in lower arm
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Gearbox, axis 3
O-ring
Grease
Lifting tool
Lifting tool
Standard toolkit
Spare part no.
See
Spare part lists on page 351 .
Art. no.
Note
Includes:
• gearbox
• o-ring
Replace only if damaged.
3HAB3772-92
3HAB3537-1
3HAC026597-001
-
3HAC025214-001
Used to lubricate the o-ring.
Instructions 3HAC 026600-002 is enclosed.
For lifting gearbox.
Content is defined in section
.
Continues on next page
282
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.7.3 Replacement of gearbox axis 3
Continued
Equipment, etc.
Other tools and procedures may be required.
See references to these procedures in the stepby-step instructions below.
Spare part no.
Art. no.
Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action Note
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Removal
The procedure below details how to remove gearbox axis 3.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
283
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.7.3 Replacement of gearbox axis 3
Continued
3
4
5
Action
Drain the oil from gearbox axis 3.
Remove the upper arm.
Note
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox on page 152 .
Detailed in the section
Replacement of the upper arm on page 214 .
While the upper arm is resting on its side on the floor, fit the lifting tool in the uppermost hole of the gearbox.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 282 .
6
CAUTION
The gearbox weighs 51 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
7
8
9
Secure the gearbox with a roundsling in an overhead crane.
Remove the attachment screws securing the gearbox to the upper arm.
Remove the gearbox and put it in a safe place.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox axis 3 on page 282
.
Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit gearbox axis 3.
1
Action
Make sure the o-ring is fitted to the gearbox.
Lightly lubricate the o-ring with grease.
Note xx0600003127
• A : O-ring 3HAB 3772-92
2
CAUTION
The gearbox weighs 51 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!
3
4
5
Fit a lifting tool in the uppermost hole of the gearbox and secure it with a roundsling.
Fit two guide pins in two of the attachment holes, parallel to each other.
Lift the gearbox on to the guide pins and push it to its mounting position.
Art. no. is specified in
Required equipment on page 282 .
Continues on next page
284 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.7.3 Replacement of gearbox axis 3
Continued
6
7
8
9
Action Note
Refit the gearbox, while the upper arm is resting on its side on the floor.
Refit the upper arm .
Detailed in the section
Replacement of the upper arm on page 214 .
Fill the gearbox axis 3 with oil.
Recalibrate the robot.
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-3 gearbox on page 152 .
Pendulum Calibration is described in
Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
10
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26 .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
285
4 Repair
4.7.4 Replacement of gearbox, axis 6
4.7.4 Replacement of gearbox, axis 6
Location of gearbox
The axis 6 gearbox is located in the center of the wrist unit as shown in the figure below.
xx0600003085
A
B
C
D
E
F
Gearbox, axis 6 (IRB 6620)
Attachment screws, gearbox
Oil plug, draining
Oil plug, filling
Turning disk
Attachment screws, turning disk
Required equipment
Equipment, etc.
Gearbox
O-ring
O-ring
O-ring
O-ring
Grease
Flange sealant
Article number
For spare part number, see
.
3HAB3772-58
Note
Includes o-ring
3HAB3772-57
3HAB3772-64
3HAB3772-61
3HAB3537-1
12340011-116
Must be replaced when reassembling gearbox.
For type 2 of the gearbox.
164.7x3.53
Must be replaced when reassembling gearbox.
For type 2 of the gearbox.
150.0x2.0
Must be replaced when reassembling gearbox.
For type 2 of the gearbox.
12 pcs, 13.1x1.6
Must be replaced when reassembling gearbox.
For lubricating the o-ring.
Loctite 574
Continues on next page
286 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
4 Repair
4.7.4 Replacement of gearbox, axis 6
Continued
Equipment, etc.
Standard toolkit -
Article number
Calibration Pendulum toolkit 3HAC15716-1
Calibration tool box, Axis
Calibration
3HAC055412-001
Note
Content is defined in section
Complete kit that also includes operating manual.
Required if Calibration Pendulum is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.
Deciding calibration routine
Decide which calibration routine to be used, based on the information in the table.
Depending on which routine is chosen, action might be required prior to beginning the repair work of the robot, see the table.
1
Action Note
Decide which calibration routine to use for calibrating the robot.
• Reference calibration. External cable packages (DressPack) and tools can stay fitted on the robot.
• Fine calibration. All external cable packages (DressPack) and tools must be removed from the robot.
If the robot is to be calibrated with reference calibration:
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
Find previous reference values for the axis or create new reference values. These values are to be used after the repair procedure is completed, for calibration of the robot.
If no previous reference values exist, and no new reference values can be created, then reference calibration is not possible.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot.
Read more about reference calibration for
Axis Calibration in
Reference calibration routine on page 321
.
Read more about reference calibration for
Pendulum Calibration in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum .
If the robot is to be calibrated with fine calibration:
Remove all external cable packages
(DressPack) and tools from the robot.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
287
4 Repair
4.7.4 Replacement of gearbox, axis 6
Continued
Removal, gearbox
The procedure below details how to remove gearbox, axis 6.
1
Action
Decide which calibration routine to use, and take actions accordingly prior to beginning the repair procedure.
Note
2
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
3
4
5
6
Drain the oil from gearbox, axis 6.
Remove the turning disc .
Detailed in the section
Changing oil, axis-6 gearbox on page 161
.
Detailed in the section
Removing, turning disk on page 206
.
Remove the gearbox by unscrewing its attachment screws .
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 286
.
If required, apply M8 screws to the holes shown in the figure beside to press the gearbox out.
Foundry Plus:
Remove old Loctite 574 flange sealant residues and other contamination from the contact surfaces.
xx0200000220
• A: M8 holes for pressing out the gearbox
Continues on next page
288
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
xx1400001123
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.7.4 Replacement of gearbox, axis 6
Continued
7
Action
Remove the gearbox axis 6 by lifting it out carefully.
Note
Be careful not to damage the motor pinion!
Refitting, gearbox
The procedure below details how to refit gearbox, axis 6.
Action Note
1
DANGER
Turn off all:
• electric power supply to the robot
• hydraulic pressure supply to the robot
• air pressure supply to the robot
Before entering the robot working area.
2 Make sure the o-ring is fitted to the rear of the gearbox. Lubricate the o-ring with grease.
Article number is specified in
Required equipment on page 286
.
3
4 xx0200000221
• A: O-ring, gearbox axis 6
Release the holding brake of motor axis 6.
Detailed in the section
Manually releasing the brakes on page 95
.
Foundry Plus:
Apply Loctite 574 flange sealant on the contact surface.
xx1400001122
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
289
4 Repair
4.7.4 Replacement of gearbox, axis 6
Continued
5
Action
Insert the gearbox, axis 6 into the wrist unit.
6 Secure the gearbox with the attachment screws and washers.
7
8
9
10
Refit the turning disc
Perform a
.
leak-down test
Refill the gearbox with oil.
Re-calibrate the robot.
.
Note
Article number is specified in
Required equipment on page 286
.
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 286 .
Make sure the gears of the gearbox mate with the gears of the motor!
Shown in the figure
Location of gearbox on page 286 .
8 pcs or 18 pcs (depending on wrist version): M8 x 40, 12.9 quality Gleitmo, Tightening torque: 30 Nm.
Reused screws may be used, providing they are lubricated as detailed in section
before fitting.
Detailed in the section
Refitting, turning disk on page 207 .
Detailed in the section
Performing a leakdown test on page 178 .
Detailed in the section
.
Pendulum Calibration is described in Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , enclosed with the calibration tools.
Axis Calibration is described in
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320 .
General calibration information is included in section
.
11
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26
.
290
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.8.1 Replacing the energy chain
4.8 Energy chain
4.8.1 Replacing the energy chain
Location of energy chain
The energy chain is located in the guide trough.
The figure shows an installation with two robots and two energy chains.
xx1500000842
Required equipment
Equipment
Energy chain
Lifting accessories
Cable straps
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-bystep instructions below.
-
-
-
Article number Note
Content is defined in section
These procedures include references to the tools required.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
291
4 Repair
4.8.1 Replacing the energy chain
Continued
Removing the energy chain
Action
1
Tip
Note
Remove all cover plates before turning off all electric power. Without 24V DC the carriage can not be moved. If the cables to the release brakes are damaged, follow instructions in xx..
2
DANGER
Turn off all electric power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot and for the linear axis.
3
4
5
6
Disconnect all cables from the robot base cable interface.
Disconnect all cables from the linear axis motor.
Cut all cable straps using standard tools.
Loosen the fixed end of the energy chain.
Screws: 4 pcs.
xx1500000840
7 Loosen the drivers end of the energy chain.
Screws: 4 pcs.
xx1500000838
Continues on next page
292
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4 Repair
4.8.1 Replacing the energy chain
Continued
8
9
Action Note
Attach lifting accessories to the energy chain.
If it is not possible to slide out the cable chain beneath the moving end bracket, the bracket needs to be removed from the cable trough.
See
Lifting and fitting the cable chain IGUS on page 106
.
Lift up the energy chain and remove it from the cable trough.
See
Lifting and fitting the cable chain IGUS on page 106
.
10 Remove the mounting angle from the fixed end connection element.
xx1500000841
Refitting the energy chain
For more information, see Installation guide - Gliding applications (IGUS) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) or visit the homepage ( www.gudel.com
).
1
2
Action
Clean the energy chain and look for wear on the energy chain. Wear on the energy chain can cause damage to the cables.
Note
Fit the mounting angle on the fixed end connection element using screws and nuts.
Screws and nuts: 4 pcs.
xx1500000841
3 Lift and place the energy chain in the cable trough.
See
Lifting and fitting the cable chain IGUS on page 106
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
293
4 Repair
4.8.1 Replacing the energy chain
Continued
4
Action
Secure the fixed end of the energy chain with screws.
Note
Screws: 2 pcs.
Make sure to tighten the two screws in equal position in the elongated attachment holes.
xx1500000840
5 Secure the driver end of the energy chain with screws.
Screws: 4 pcs.
xx1500000838
6
7
8
Strap all the cables (A).
The cables exiting the chain, on both the driver and fixed end, need to be strapped individually at least twice in order to strain relief correctly. If there are not enough holes available in the connection plates for individual strapping, the cables should be secured in such a way that they can not move.
Connect all cables to the linear axis motor.
Connect all cables to the robot base cable interface.
9
DANGER
Make sure all safety requirements are met when performing the first test run. These are further detailed in the section
First test run may cause injury or damage on page 26
.
10 Perform a test run before powering up the linear axis to full speed and duty cycle.
See
.
Continues on next page
294 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Test run
4 Repair
4.8.1 Replacing the energy chain
Continued
Use this procedure to check the installation of the cabling.
1
2
Action
Run the system at low speed and insure that everything runs freely and smoothly without the carrier, cables and/or hoses binding.
After 50 cycles, check that the cables and hoses are not installed too tight (stretched between carrier bars) or too loose (hanging on the carrier bars). Optimally, aim for the center line of the link of the carrier system, as shown in the figure.
Note
1 xx1200000518
3
4
5
6
7
Adjust the carrier position or alignment, if needed.
Adjust the position and length of cables and/or hoses, if needed.
If adjustments are made, repeat steps
to
.
Tighten all screws.
The track is now ready to be powered up to full speed and duty cycle.
Check the tightening torque on fastening screws after 500 cycles. Adjust, if needed.
Periodically check to see if the cable strain relief is still in place.
2
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
295
4 Repair
4.8.2 Replacing cables in the energy chain
4.8.2 Replacing cables in the energy chain
Documentation
For more information, see Installation guide - Gliding applications (IGUS) on myABB business portal ( www.myportal.abb.com
) or visit the homepage ( www.gudel.com
).
Layout of cables inside the energy chain
Cable layout, material handling - with hydraulic hose xx1500000843
3
4
5
1
2
8
9
6
7
Power 2
Power 1
Air
Signal SMB
Profinet Power
Earth Güdel
Earth Leoni
Profinet
Lubrication
Continues on next page
296
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Cable layout, spot welding xx1500000844
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
11
4
5
6
1
2
3
Power 1
Power 2
Water To
Water From
Air
Weld 2
Weld 3
Lubrication
Weld 1
KSR
Signal SMB
Profinet Power
Earth Leoni
Earth Güdel
Profinet
4 Repair
4.8.2 Replacing cables in the energy chain
Continued
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
297
This page is intentionally left blank
5 Calibration
5.1.1 Introduction and calibration terminology
5 Calibration
5.1 Introduction to calibration
5.1.1 Introduction and calibration terminology
Calibration information
This chapter includes general information about the recommended calibration methods and also the detailed procedures for updating the revolution counters, checking the calibration position etc.
Detailed instructions of how to perform Axis Calibration are given on the
FlexPendant during the calibration procedure. To prepare calibration with Axis
Calibration method, see
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320 .
Detailed instructions of how to perform Pendulum Calibration are given in the documentation enclosed with the calibration tools.
Calibration terminology
Term
Calibration method
Synchronization position
Calibration position
Standard calibration
Fine calibration
Reference calibration
Update revolution counter
Synchronization mark
Definition
A collective term for several methods that might be available for calibrating the ABB robot. Each method contains calibration routines.
Known position of the complete robot where the angle of each axis can be checked against visual synchronization marks.
Known position of the complete robot that is used for calibration of the robot.
A generic term for all calibration methods that aim to move the robot to calibration position.
A calibration routine that generates a new zero position of the robot.
A calibration routine that in the first step generates a reference to current zero position of the robot. The same calibration routine can later on be used to recalibrate the robot back to the same position as when the reference was stored.
This routine is more flexible compared to fine calibration and is used when tools and process equipment are installed.
Requires that a reference is created before being used for recalibrating the robot.
Requires that the robot is dressed with the same tools and process equipment during calibration as during creation of the reference values.
A calibration routine to make a rough calibration of each manipulator axis.
Visual marks on the robot axes. When marks are aligned, the robot is in synchronization position.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
299
5 Calibration
5.1.2 Calibration methods
5.1.2 Calibration methods
Overview
This section specifies the different types of calibration and the calibration methods that are supplied by ABB.
Types of calibration
Type of calibration Description Calibration method i
Standard calibration The calibrated robot is positioned at calibration position.
Standard calibration data is found on the SMB
(serial measurement board) or EIB in the robot.
For robots with RobotWare 5.04 or older, the calibration data is delivered in a file, calib.cfg, supplied with the robot at delivery. The file identifies the correct resolver/motor position corresponding to the robot home position.
Axis Calibration or Calibration Pendulum i
Levelmeter calibration
(alternative method)
The robot is calibrated by either Calibration Pendulum or Axis Calibration at factory. Always use the same calibration method as used at the factory.
Information about valid calibration method is found on the calibration label or in the calibration menu on the FlexPendant.
If no data is found related to standard calibration, Calibration Pendulum is used as default.
Brief description of calibration methods
Calibration Pendulum method
Calibration Pendulum is a standard calibration method for calibration of all ABB robots (except IRB 6400R, IRB 640, IRB 1400H, and IRB 4400S).
Two different routines are available for the Calibration Pendulum method:
• Calibration Pendulum II
• Reference calibration
The calibration equipment for Calibration Pendulum is delivered as a complete toolkit, including the Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , which describes the method and the different routines further.
Axis Calibration method
Axis Calibration is a standard calibration method for calibration of IRB 6620LX and is the most accurate method for the standard calibration. It is the recommended method in order to achieve proper performance.
The following routines are available for the Axis Calibration method:
• Fine calibration
• Update revolution counters
• Reference calibration
The calibration equipment for Axis Calibration is delivered as a toolkit.
An introduction to the calibration method is given in this manual, see
Calibrating with Axis Calibration method on page 320 .
Continues on next page
300
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.1.2 Calibration methods
Continued
The actual instructions of how to perform the calibration procedure and what to do at each step is given on the FlexPendant. You will be guided through the calibration procedure, step by step.
Levelmeter calibration - alternative method
Levelmeter calibration is referred to as the alternative method for calibration of
ABB robots because of the less accurate values obtained during calibration. The method uses the same principles as Calibration Pendulum, but does not have as good of mechanical tolerances to the toolkit parts as the standard method with
Calibration Pendulum.
This method may, after calibration, require modifications in the robot program and is therefore not recommended.
The calibration equipment (Levelmeter 2000) for levelmeter calibration is ordered as separate parts for each robot, and includes the Operating manual - Levelmeter
Calibration , which describes the method and the different routines further.
References
Article numbers for the calibration tools are listed in the section
.
The calibration equipment for Calibration Pendulum is delivered as a complete toolkit, including the Operating manual - Calibration Pendulum , which describes the method and the different routines further.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
301
5 Calibration
5.1.3 When to calibrate
5.1.3 When to calibrate
When to calibrate
The system must be calibrated if any of the following situations occur.
The resolver values are changed
If resolver values are changed, the robot must be recalibrated using the calibration methods supplied by ABB. Calibrate the robot carefully with standard calibration, according to information in this manual.
The resolver values will change when parts affecting the calibration position are replaced on the robot, for example motors or parts of the transmission.
The revolution counter memory is lost
If the revolution counter memory is lost, the counters must be updated. See
Updating revolution counters on page 314
. This will occur when:
• The battery is discharged
• A resolver error occurs
• The signal between a resolver and measurement board is interrupted
• A robot axis is moved with the control system disconnected
The revolution counters must also be updated after the robot and controller are connected at the first installation.
The robot is rebuilt
If the robot is rebuilt, for example, after a crash or when the reach ability of a robot is changed, it needs to be recalibrated for new resolver values.
Axis 1 calibration
Axis 1 calibration needs to be performed at installation of the robot (axes 2-6) on the linear axis (axis 1) when commissioning the complete robot system. See
Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1 on page 305
.
302
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.2.1 Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes
5.2 Synchronization marks and axis movement directions
5.2.1 Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes
Introduction
This section shows the position of the synchronization marks and the synchronization position for each axis.
Synchronization marks, IRB 6620LX xx0900000223
A
B
Synchronization mark, axis 1 (optional location) i
C
D
E
Synchronization mark, axis 2
Synchronization mark, axis 3
Synchronization mark, axis 4
Synchronization mark, axis 5 i
F Synchronization mark, axis 6
The location of the synchronization mark for axis 1 is optional and can be placed at a suitable position for the installation.
303 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Calibration
5.2.2 Calibration movement directions for all axes
5.2.2 Calibration movement directions for all axes
Overview
When calibrating, the axis must consistently be run towards the calibration position in the same direction in order to avoid position errors caused by backlash in gears and so on. Positive directions are shown in the graphic below.
Calibration service routines will handle the calibration movements automatically and these might be different from the positive directions shown below.
Manual movement directions IRB6620 LX xx0900000140
304
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
General
This section describes how to fine calibrate axis 1 of IRB 6620LX.
The calibration procedure differs depending on if the Axis Calibration method is available or not. This section describes both procedures.
Required equipment
Use the equipment specified if the Axis Calibration method is used for calibration of axis 1.
Equipment
Drill gauge
Axis Calibration support block -
-
Article number
Calibration tool box, Axis Calibration
3HAC055412-001
Note
From Güdel
From Güdel
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Travel directions for axis 1 xx0900000386
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
305
5 Calibration
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
Continued
Calibrating axis 1 with Axis Calibration method
Installation of the Axis Calibration support block
If the Axis Calibration support block is not already installed on the beam, use this procedure to install it.
1
Action Note
Manually run the robot axis
1 to an optional calibration position.
The calibration position has to be close to an end point with minimum 100 mm clearance between the dampers of the carriage and the end stop.
xx1600001123
A Minimum clearance 100 mm (also other end of beam)
Continues on next page
306
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
Continued
2
Action Note
Locate the fixed calibration pin on the carriage.
Wall mounted: xx1600001130
Suspended: xx1600001131
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
307
5 Calibration
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
Continued
3
Action
Move the carriage to contact with the end stop in order to make space for the drill gauge.
Note
4
5
Place the drill gauge over the fixed calibration pin and against the surface of the beam.
The drill gauge fixes itself with magnets.
Place the gauge so that it points away from the end stop.
Drill the fastening threads for the Axis Calibration support block screws (2 x M8) by using the drilling gauge.
xx1600001132 xx1600001133
Continues on next page
308
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
Continued
6
Action Note
Fit the Axis Calibration support block to the beam with screws. Orient it according to the figure.
Do not tighten yet.
Screws: M8x50 8.8 (2 pcs).
xx1600001134
7
8
Adjust the height of the support block (measurement 20 mm) by adding or removing shims.
Check the measurement 5.5
mm and adjust within the tolerance of the M8 screws.
Tighten the M8 screws.
Measurement 20 +/- 2 mm is defined by the number of shims (A). Add or remove shims. There are two 2 mm shims supplied with the delivery.
Measurement 5.5 +2/-1.5 mm is defined by the correct location of the drill gauge.
9 Drill two holes for dowel pins (2 x Ø6 H7) using the
Axis Calibration support block for guidance.
xx1600001136 xx1600001137
10 Insert the supplied dowel pins.
Dowel pins: 2 x Ø6 M6x20
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
309
5 Calibration
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
Continued
Calibrating axis 1
Use this procedure to calibrate axis 1 with the Axis Calibration method.
1
2
Action Note
Configure Gravity Beta for the robot.
See
Setting the system parameters for a suspended or tilted robot on page 100 .
Put the carriage in position to align the fixed pin on the carriage with the bushing in the
Axis Calibration support block. Manually update the revolution counters.
See
Updating revolution counters on page 314 .
3
4
5 xx1700000973
Run the fine calibration routine for Axis Calibration to calibrate axis 1.
See
Axis Calibration - Running the calibration procedure on page 327
.
Fit the synchronization mark plate on the carriage (B).
Find the position of the synchronization mark plate for the frame (A) by lining it up against the plate on the carriage.
6 Fit the synchronization mark plate to the frame, using a drill for M5 screw hole distance 60 mm.
xx0900000387
A Synchronization mark plate on the frame, axis 1
B Synchronization mark plate on the carriage, axis
1
60 xx0900000388
Continues on next page
310
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
Continued
Calibrating axis 1 without Axis Calibration method
Calibrating axis 1
Use this procedure to calibrate axis 1 when the Axis Calibration method is not available. See
Calibration methods on page 300 .
1
2
3
4
Action Note
Configure Gravity Beta for the robot.
See
Setting the system parameters for a suspended or tilted robot on page 100
.
Manually run the robot axis 1 to an optional calibration position.
Fit the synchronization mark plate on the carriage (B).
Find the position of the synchronization mark plate for the frame (A) by lining it up against the plate on the carriage.
5 Fit the synchronization mark plate to the frame, using a drill for M5 screw hole distance 60 mm.
xx0900000387
A Synchronization mark plate on the frame, axis 1
B Synchronization mark plate on the carriage, axis 1
60 xx0900000388
6 Calibrate robot axis 1 using the FlexPendant.
See
Fine calibration procedure on FlexPendant on page 312
CAUTION
This calibration method is only valid for axis 1. For all other axes the calibration methods described in section
Calibration methods on page 300
must be used.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
311
5 Calibration
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
Continued
Fine calibration procedure on FlexPendant
Use this procedure to fine calibrate using the FlexPendant.
Action
1
WARNING
Do not fine calibrate the robot without special equipment used for axis calibration! It would cause an unsatisfactory accuracy in the robot movement.
2
3
On the ABB menu, tap Calibration .
All mechanical units connected to the system are shown along with their calibration status.
Tap to select the mechanical unit and then tap Calib. Parameters .
xx1500001762
4
5
6
Tap Fine Calibration...
.
A dialog box is displayed, urging you to use external equipment to performing the actual calibration. Make sure all necessary calibration equipment is fitted, as detailed in the calibration instruction, for the axis to be calibrated.
A dialog box is displayed, warning that updating the revolution counters may change programmed robot positions:
• Tap Yes to proceed.
• Tap No to cancel.
Select the check-box for the axis to calibrate.
Tap Calibrate .
A dialog box is displayed, warning that calibration of the selected axes will be changed, which cannot be undone:
• Tap Calibrate to proceed.
• Tap Cancel to cancel.
Tapping Calibrate results in briefly displaying a dialog box, announcing that the calibration process has started.
The axis is calibrated and the system returns to the list of available mechanical units.
Continues on next page
312 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Calibration
5.3 Calibration and configuration of Joint Bound, axis 1
Continued
Configuration of Joint Bound axis 1
Use this procedure to configure the Joint Bound system parameters on the
FlexPendant.
1
2
4
5
6
7
3
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Action
Switch to manual mode.
Note
On the FlexPendant, tap the ABB menu and then tap Control
Panel.
Tap Configuration .
This opens the system parameters configuration editor.
Tap the menu Topics and then tap Motion .
Select the type Arm and tap Show All .
Select rob 1_1 and tap Edit .
Both Upper Joint Bound and Lower Joint Bound are initially set to 0.
This results in impossible motion of axis
1.
Tap Upper Joint Bound twice to change the value.
Use a large value, for example 50 meters.
Tap Lower Joint Bound twice to change the value.
Use a large negative value, for example-50 meters.
Tap OK .
Tap YES to restart the controller.
When the controller is restarted, it is possible to jog the robot to a suitable position for configuration of Upper Joint Bound and Lower Joint Bound .
Jog the robot to a suitable positive position.
Read the position from the Jogging window.
Open the system parameters configuration editor again from the Control Panel .
Change Upper Joint Bound to the present position.
Jog the robot to a suitable negative position.
Read the position from the Jogging window.
Change Lower Joint Bound to the present position.
Close the configuration editor and restart the controller.
The system is now ok.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
313
5 Calibration
5.4 Updating revolution counters
5.4 Updating revolution counters
Introduction
This section describes how to do a rough calibration of each manipulator axis by updating the revolution counter for each axis, using the FlexPendant.
Revolution indicator
The IRB 6620/IRB 6620 LX (not Foundry version) is equipped with a revolution indicator on axis 4.
Location
The revolution indicator is located as shown in figure.
Function xx1500002405
Before doing an update of the revolution counter, the revolution indicator must be checked.
The green side of the indicator shall point towards axis centre.
The indicatior shows if axis 4 is turned correctly or has been rotated more than
±360°. If the indicator has been turned, the robot has to be jogged manually in the
Continues on next page
314
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.4 Updating revolution counters
Continued opposite direction to reach the correct position before aligning synchronization marks. If not there is a risk of twisting the cabling.
• When turning axis 4, the indicator will move accordingly, up or down.
xx1500002449
Check indicator before synchonization
1
Action
Make sure that the green side of the indicator is turned towards the axis 4 center.
Note
2 If not:
Jog the robot manually in the opposite direction to reach the correct position.
xx1500002404 xx1500002449
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
315
5 Calibration
5.4 Updating revolution counters
Continued
3
Action
If the indicator moves towards red when jogging, switch to the opposite direction to reach green side.
Note
CAUTION
If axis 4 is turned too much, the red side of the indicator will turn towards axis 4 and the cabling may be damaged. Jog the robot in the opposite direction.
4 xx1500002450
If the red side of the indicator points towards axis
4 centre, make a check that the motor cabling and motor connectors are not damaged. Replace if damaged.
Step 1 - Manually running the manipulator to the synchronization position
Use this procedure to manually run the manipulator to the synchronization position.
1
2
3
Action
Select axis-by-axis motion mode.
Note
Jog the manipulator to align the synchronization marks.
See
Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes on page 303 .
When all axes are positioned, update the revolution counter.
Step 2 - Updating the revolution counter with the FlexPendant on page 317 .
Correct calibration position of axis 4 and 6
When jogging the manipulator to synchronization position, it is extremely important to make sure that axes 4 and 6 of the following mentioned manipulators are positioned correctly. The axes can be calibrated at the wrong turn, resulting in an incorrect manipulator calibration.
Make sure the axes are positioned according to the correct calibration values, not only according to the synchronization marks. The correct values are found on a label, located either on the lower arm, underneath the flange plate on the base or on the frame.
At delivery the manipulator is in the correct position, do NOT rotate axis 4 or 6 at power up before the revolution counters are updated.
If one of the following mentioned axes are rotated one or more turns from its calibration position before updating the revolution counter, the correct calibration
Continues on next page
316
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.4 Updating revolution counters
Continued position will be lost due to non-integer gear ratio. This affects the following manipulators:
Manipulator variant
IRB 6620LX
Axis 4
Yes
Axis 6
No
If the synchronization marks seem to be wrong (even if the motor calibration data is correct), try to rotate the axis one turn, update the revolution counter and check the synchronization marks again (try both directions, if needed).
Step 2 - Updating the revolution counter with the FlexPendant
Use this procedure to update the revolution counter with the FlexPendant (IRC5).
1
Action
On the ABB menu, tap Calibration .
xx1500000942
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
317
5 Calibration
5.4 Updating revolution counters
Continued
2
Action
All mechanical units connected to the system are shown with their calibration status.
Tap the mechanical unit in question.
xx1500000943
3 This step is valid for RobotWare 6.02 and later.
Calibration method used at factory for each axis is shown, as well as calibration method used during last field calibration.
Tap Manual Method (Advanced) .
Continues on next page
318 xx1500000944
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
4
Action
A screen is displayed, tap Rev. Counters .
5 Calibration
5.4 Updating revolution counters
Continued en0400000771
5
6
7
Tap Update Revolution Counters...
.
A dialog box is displayed, warning that updating the revolution counters may change programmed robot positions:
• Tap Yes to update the revolution counters.
• Tap No to cancel updating the revolution counters.
Tapping Yes displays the axis selection window.
Select the axis to have its revolution counter updated by:
• Ticking in the box to the left
• Tapping Select all to update all axes.
Then tap Update .
A dialog box is displayed, warning that the updating operation cannot be undone:
• Tap Update to proceed with updating the revolution counters.
• Tap Cancel to cancel updating the revolution counters.
Tapping Update updates the selected revolution counters and removes the tick from the list of axes.
8
CAUTION
If a revolution counter is incorrectly updated, it will cause incorrect manipulator positioning, which in turn may cause damage or injury!
Check the synchronization position very carefully after each update. See
Checking the synchronization position on page 335
.
319 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Calibration
5.5.1 Description of Axis Calibration
5.5 Calibrating with Axis Calibration method
5.5.1 Description of Axis Calibration
Instructions for Axis Calibration procedure given on the FlexPendant
The actual instructions of how to perform the calibration procedure and what to do at each step is given on the FlexPendant. You will be guided through the calibration procedure, step by step.
This manual contains a brief description of the method, additional information to the information given on the FlexPendant, article number for the tools and images of where to fit the calibration tools on the robot.
Overview of the Axis Calibration procedure
The Axis Calibration procedure applies to all axes, and is performed on one axis at the time. The robot axes are both manually and automatically moved into position, as instructed on the FlexPendant.
A fixed calibration pin/bushing is installed on each robot axis at delivery.
The Axis Calibration procedure described roughly:
• A removable calibration tool is inserted by the operator into a calibration bushing on the axis chosen for calibration, according to instructions on the
FlexPendant.
WARNING
Calibrating the robot with Axis Calibration requires special calibration tools from ABB. Using other pins in the calibration bushings may cause severe damage to the robot and/or personnel.
WARNING
The calibration tool must be fully inserted into the calibration bushing, until the steel spring ring snaps into place.
• During the calibration procedure, RobotWare moves the robot axis chosen for calibration so that the calibration tools get into contact. RobotWare records values of the axis position and repeats the coming-in-contact procedure several times to get an exact value of the axis position.
WARNING
Risk of pinching! The contact force for large robots can be up to 150 kg.
Keep a safe distance to the robot.
• The axis position is stored in RobotWare with an active choice from the operator.
Continues on next page
320 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Calibration
5.5.1 Description of Axis Calibration
Continued
Routines in the calibration procedure
The following routines are available in the Axis Calibration procedure, given at the beginning of the procedure on the FlexPendant.
Fine calibration routine
Choose this routine to calibrate the robot when there are no tools, process cabling or equipment fitted to the robot.
Reference calibration routine
Choose this routine to create reference values and to calibrate the robot when the robot is dressed with tools, process cabling or other equipment.
Also choose this routine if the robot is wall mounted or suspended.
If calibrating the robot with reference calibration there must be reference values created before repair is made to the robot, if values are not already available.
Creating new values requires possibility to move the robot. The reference values contain positions of all axes, torque of axes and technical data about the tool installed. A benefit with reference calibration is that the current state of the robot is stored and not the state when the robot left the ABB factory. The reference value will be named according to tool name, date etc.
Follow the instructions given in the reference calibration routine on the FlexPendant to create reference values.
When reference calibration is performed, the robot is restored to the status given by the reference values.
Note
Update revolution counters
Choose this routine to make a rough calibration of each manipulator axis by updating the revolution counter for each axis, using the FlexPendant.
Validation
When calibrating the robot with the reference calibration routine, the robot must be dressed with the same tools, process cabling and any other equipment as when the reference values were created.
In the mentioned routines, it is also possible to validate the calibration data.
Position of robot axes
The axis chosen for calibration is automatically run by the calibration program to its calibration position during the calibration procedure.
In order for the axis to be able to be moved to calibration position, or in order for getting proper access to the calibration bushing, other axes might need to be jogged to positions different from 0 degrees. Information about which axes are allowed to be jogged will be given on the FlexPendant. These axes are marked with Unrestricted in the FlexPendant window.
How to calibrate a suspended or wall mounted robot
The IRB 6620LX is calibrated floor standing in factory, prior to shipping.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
321
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Calibration
5.5.1 Description of Axis Calibration
Continued
To calibrate a suspended or wall mounted robot, reference calibration must be used. Reference values for a suspended or a wall mounted robot must be created with the robot mounted at its working position, not standing on a floor.
To calibrate a suspended or wall mounted robot with the fine calibration routine, the robot must first be taken down and mounted standing on the floor.
322
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.5.2 Calibration tools for Axis Calibration
5.5.2 Calibration tools for Axis Calibration
Calibration tool set
The calibration tools used for Axis Calibration are designed to meet requirements for calibration performance, durability and safety in case of accidental damage.
The calibration tool will eventually break from fatigue after longer period of use and then needs to be replaced. There is no risk for bad calibrations as long as the calibration tool is in one piece.
WARNING
Calibrating the robot with Axis Calibration requires special calibration tools from
ABB. Using other pins in the calibration bushings may cause severe damage to the robot and/or personnel.
Equipment, etc.
Calibration tool box,
Axis Calibration
Article number
3HAC055412-001
Note
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Examining the calibration tool
Check prior to usage
Before using the calibration tool, make sure that the tube insert, the plastic protection and the steel spring ring are present.
WARNING
If any part is missing or damaged, the tool must be replaced immediately.
xx1500001914
A
B
C
Tube insert
Plastic protection
Steel spring ring
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
323
5 Calibration
5.5.2 Calibration tools for Axis Calibration
Continued
Periodic check of the calibration tool
If including the calibration tool in a local periodic check system, the following measures should be checked.
• Outer diameter within Ø12g4 mm, Ø8g4 mm or Ø6g5 mm (depending on calibration tool size).
• Straightness within 0.005 mm.
xx1500000951
A Outer diameter
Identifying the calibrating tools
It is possible to make the calibration tool identifiable with, for example, an RFID chip. The procedure of how to install an RFID chip is described below.
2
Note
1
The tool identifier is NOT delivered from ABB, it is a customized solution.
Action
It is possible to use any RFID solution, with the correct dimensions. ABB has verifed function on some suppliers fulfilling the requirements of NFC compatible devices (13.56 Mhz) according to ISO
14443 or ISO 15693.
Note
Note
The maximum dimensions on the RFID chip must not exceed Ø7.9 mm x 8.0 mm, Ø5.9 mm x 8.0
mm or Ø3.9 mm x 8.0 mm (depending on calibration tool size).
There is a cavity on one end of the calibration tool in which the RFID chip can be installed.
Install the RFID chip according to supplier instructions.
Install the chip in flush with the tool end.
324
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.5.3 Installation locations for the calibration tools
5.5.3 Installation locations for the calibration tools
Location of fixed calibration items
This section shows how the robot is equipped with items for installation of calibration tools for Axis Calibration (fixed calibration pins and/or bushings).
Installed calibration tools are not shown.
A fixed calibration pin and a bushing for the movable calibration tool are located on each axis as follows.
1 xx1600000004 xx1600000002
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
325
5 Calibration
5.5.3 Installation locations for the calibration tools
Continued
Spare parts xx1600000003
When calibration is not being performed, a protective cover and an o-ring should always be installed on the fixed calibration pin as well as a protective plug, included a sealing, in the bushing. Replace damaged parts with new, if needed.
Spare part
Protection cover and plug set
Article number
3HAC056806-001
Note
Contains replacement calibration pin covers and protective plugs for the bushing.
326
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.5.4 Axis Calibration - Running the calibration procedure
5.5.4 Axis Calibration - Running the calibration procedure
Required tools
The calibration tools used for Axis Calibration are designed to meet requirements for calibration performance, durability and safety in case of accidental damage.
WARNING
Calibrating the robot with Axis Calibration requires special calibration tools from
ABB. Using other pins in the calibration holes may cause severe damage to the robot and/or personnel.
Equipment, etc.
Calibration tool box, Axis
Calibration
Article number
3HAC055412-001
Note
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Required consumables
Consumable
Clean cloth
Spare parts
Spare part
Protection cover and plug set
-
Article number Note
Article number
3HAC056806-001
Note
Contains replacement calibration pin covers and protective plugs for the bushing.
Overview of the calibration procedure on the FlexPendant
The actual instructions of how to perform the calibration procedure and what to do at each step is given on the FlexPendant. You will be guided through the calibration procedure, step by step.
Use the following list to learn about the calibration procedure before running the
RobotWare program on the FlexPendant. It gives you a brief overview of the calibration procedure sequence.
After the calibration method has been called for on the FlexPendant, the following sequence will be run.
1 Choose calibration routine. The routines are described in
Routines in the calibration procedure on page 321
.
2 Choose which axis/axes to calibrate.
3 The robot moves to synchronization position.
4 Validate the synchronization marks.
5 The robot moves to preparation position.
6 Remove the protective cover from the fixed pin and the protection plug from the bushing, if any, and install the calibration tool.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
327
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Calibration
5.5.4 Axis Calibration - Running the calibration procedure
Continued
7 The robot performs a measurement sequence by rotating the axis back and forth.
8 Remove the calibration tool and reinstall the protective cover on the fixed pin and the protection plug in the bushing, if any.
9 The robot moves to verify that the calibration tool is removed.
10 Choose whether to save the calibration data or not.
Calibration of the robot is not finished until the calibration data is saved, as last step of the calibration procedure.
Preparation prior to calibration
The calibration procedure is described in the FlexPendant while conducting it.
Action Note
1
DANGER
While conducting the calibration, the robot needs to be connected to power.
Make sure that the robots working area is empty, as the robot can make unpredictable movements.
2 Wipe the calibration tool clean.
Use a clean cloth.
Note
The calibration method is exact. Dust, dirt or color flakes will affect the calibration value.
Starting the calibration procedure
Use this procedure to call for the Axis Calibration method on the FlexPendant.
1
Action
On the ABB menu, tap Calibration .
Note xx1500000942
Continues on next page
328
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.5.4 Axis Calibration - Running the calibration procedure
Continued
2
Action
All mechanical units connected to the system are shown with their calibration status.
Tap the mechanical unit in question.
Note xx1500000943
3 Calibration method used at factory for each axis is shown, as well as calibration method used for the robot during last field calibration.
Tap Run Calibration Method . The software will automatically call for the procedure for the valid calibration method.
The FlexPendant will give all information needed to proceed with Axis
Calibration.
xx1500000944
4 Follow the instructions given on the FlexPendant.
A brief overview of the sequence that will be run on the FlexPendant is given in
Overview of the calibration procedure on the FlexPendant on page 327 .
Restarting an interrupted calibration procedure
If the Axis Calibration procedure is interrupted before the calibration is finished, the RobotWare program needs to be started again. Use this procedure to take required action.
Situation Action
The three-position enabling device on the
FlexPendant has been released during robot movement.
Press and hold the three-position enabling device and press Play .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
329
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
5 Calibration
5.5.4 Axis Calibration - Running the calibration procedure
Continued
Situation Action
The RobotWare program is terminated with
PP to Main .
Remove the calibration tool, if it is installed, and restart the calibration procedure from the beginning. See
Starting the calibration procedure on page 328
.
If the calibration tool is in contact the robot axis needs to be jogged in order to release the calibration tool. Jogging the axis in wrong direction will cause the calibration tool to break. Directions of axis movement is shown in
Calibration movement directions for all axes on page 304
Axis Calibration with SafeMove option
To be able to run Axis Calibration SafeMove needs to be unsynchronized. The Axis
Calibration routine recognizes if the robot is equipped with SafeMove and will force
SafeMove to unsynchronize automatically.
However, SafeMove may generate other warning messages anytime during the
Axis Calibration routine.
Safety controller not synchronized - SafeMove message
1
Action
SafeMove generates the message "Safety controller not synchronized".
Note
2
3 xx1500002480
Confirm unsynchronized state by pressing Acknowledge to continue Axis Calibration procedure.
Restart Axis Calibration procedure by pressing
Play .
Continues on next page
330
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.5.4 Axis Calibration - Running the calibration procedure
Continued
Unsynchronized speed exceeded - SafeMove message while saving robot data
1
Action
SafeMove generates the message "Unsynchronized speed exceeded" while saving robot data.
Note xx1500002481
2
3
Press Acknowledge to continue Axis Calibration procedure.
Restart Axis Calibration procedure by pressing
Play .
Unsynchronized time limit expired - SafeMove message anytime during Axis Calibration routine
1
Action
SafeMove generates the message "Unsynchronized time limit expired" (anytime).
Note
2
3 xx1500002482
Press OK to continue Axis Calibration procedure.
Restart Axis Calibration procedure by pressing
Play .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Continues on next page
331
5 Calibration
5.5.4 Axis Calibration - Running the calibration procedure
Continued
After calibration
1
2
Action
Check the o-ring on the fixed calibration pin.
Replace if damaged or missing.
Reinstall the protective cover on the fixed calibration pin on each axis, directly after the axis has been calibrated.
Replace the cover with new spare part, if missing or damaged.
Note
3 Reinstall the protective plug and sealing in the bushing on each axis, directly after the axis has been calibrated. Ensure that the sealing is not damaged.
Replace the plug and the sealing with new spare part, if missing or damaged.
xx1600002102
Protection cover and plug set:
3HAC056806-001.
xx1500000952
Protection cover and plug set:
3HAC056806-001.
332
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.6 Calibrating with Calibration Pendulum method
5.6 Calibrating with Calibration Pendulum method
Where to find information for Calibration Pendulum
Detailed instructions of how to perform Pendulum Calibration are given in the documentation enclosed with the calibration tools.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
333
5 Calibration
5.7 Verifying the calibration
5.7 Verifying the calibration
Introduction
Always verify the results after calibrating any robot axis to verify that all calibration positions are correct.
Verifying the calibration
Use this procedure to verify the calibration result.
1
2
3
4
Action Note
Run the calibration home position program twice.
Do not change the position of the robot axes after running the program!
See
Checking the synchronization position on page 335 .
Adjust the synchronization marks when the calibration is done, if necessary.
This is detailed in section
Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes on page 303 .
Write down the values on a new label and stick it on top of the calibration label.
The label is located on the lower arm.
Remove any calibration equipment from the robot.
334
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
5 Calibration
5.8 Checking the synchronization position
5.8 Checking the synchronization position
Introduction
Check the synchronization position of the robot before beginning any programming of the robot system. This may be done:
• Using a MoveAbsJ instruction with argument zero on all axes.
• Using the Jogging window on the FlexPendant.
Using a MoveAbsJ instruction
Use this procedure to create a program that runs all the robot axes to their synchronization position.
1
2
3
4
Action
On ABB menu tap Program editor .
Create a new program.
Use MoveAbsJ in the Motion&Proc menu.
Create the following program:
MoveAbsJ [[0,0,0,0,0,0],
[9E9,9E9,9E9,9E9,9E9,9E9]]
\NoEOffs, v1000, fine, tool0
Note
5
6
Run the program in manual mode.
Check that the synchronization marks for the axes align correctly. If they do not, update the revolution counters.
See
Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes on page 303
and
Updating revolution counters on page 314 .
Using the jogging window
Use this procedure to jog the robot to the synchronization position of all axes.
1
2
3
4
5
Action
On the ABB menu, tap Jogging .
Note
Tap Motion mode to select group of axes to jog.
Tap to select the axis to jog, axis 1, 2, or
3.
Manually run the robots axes to a position where the axis position value read on the
FlexPendant, is equal to zero.
Check that the synchronization marks for the axes align correctly. If they do not, update the revolution counters.
See
Synchronization marks and synchronization position for axes on page 303
and
Updating revolution counters on page 314 .
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
335
This page is intentionally left blank
6 Decommissioning
6.1 Environmental information
6 Decommissioning
6.1 Environmental information
Symbol
The following symbol indicates that the product must not be disposed of as common garbage. Handle each product according to local regulations for the respective content (see table below).
xx1800000058
Hazardous material
The table specifies some of the materials in the product and their respective use throughout the product.
Dispose components properly according to local regulations to prevent health or environmental hazards.
Material
Batteries, NiCad or Lithium
Copper
Cast iron/nodular iron
Steel
Neodymium
Plastic/rubber
Oil, grease
Aluminium
Nickel
Example application
Serial measurement board
Cables, motors
Base, lower arm, upper arm
Gears, screws, base frame, and so on.
Brakes, motors
Cables, connectors, drive belts, and so on.
Gearboxes
Covers, synchronization brackets
Turning disc (foundry)
Oil and grease
Where possible, arrange for oil and grease to be recycled. Dispose of via an authorized person/contractor in accordance with local regulations. Do not dispose of oil and grease near lakes, ponds, ditches, down drains, or onto soil. Incineration must be carried out under controlled conditions in accordance with local regulations.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
337
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
6 Decommissioning
6.1 Environmental information
Continued
Also note that:
• Spills can form a film on water surfaces causing damage to organisms.
Oxygen transfer could also be impaired.
• Spillage can penetrate the soil causing ground water contamination.
338
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
6 Decommissioning
6.2 Scrapping of robot
6.2 Scrapping of robot
Important when scrapping the robot
DANGER
When a robot is disassembled while being scrapped, it is very important to remember the following before disassembling starts, in order to prevent injuries:
• Always remove all batteries. If a battery is exposed to heat, for example from a blow torch, it will explode.
• Always remove all oil/grease in gearboxes. If exposed to heat, for example from a blow torch, the oil/grease will catch fire.
• When motors are removed from the robot, the robot will collapse if it is not properly supported before the motor is removed.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
339
This page is intentionally left blank
7 Reference information
7.1 Applicable standards
7 Reference information
7.1 Applicable standards
Note
The listed standards are valid at the time of the release of this document. Phased out or replaced standards are removed from the list when needed.
Standards, EN ISO
The product is designed in accordance with the requirements of:
Standard
EN ISO 12100:2010
EN ISO 13849-1:2015
EN ISO 13850:2015
EN ISO 10218-1:2011
Description
Safety of machinery - General principles for design - Risk assessment and risk reduction
Safety of machinery, safety related parts of control systems -
Part 1: General principles for design
Safety of machinery - Emergency stop - Principles for design
Robots for industrial environments - Safety requirements -Part
1 Robot
ISO 9787:2013
ISO 9283:1998
EN ISO 14644-1:2015
EN ISO 13732-1:2008 i
Robots and robotic devices -- Coordinate systems and motion nomenclatures
Manipulating industrial robots, performance criteria, and related test methods
Classification of air cleanliness
Ergonomics of the thermal environment - Part 1
EMC, Generic emission EN 61000-6-4:2007 +
A1:2011
IEC 61000-6-4:2006 +
A1:2010
(option 129-1)
EN 61000-6-2:2005
IEC 61000-6-2:2005
EN IEC 60974-1:2012 ii
EN IEC 60974-10:2014
EMC, Generic immunity
Arc welding equipment - Part 1: Welding power sources
Arc welding equipment - Part 10: EMC requirements
EN IEC 60204-1:2006 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part
1 General requirements i ii
IEC 60529:1989 + A2:2013 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
Only robots with protection Clean Room.
Only valid for arc welding robots. Replaces EN IEC 61000-6-4 for arc welding robots.
European standards
Standard
EN 614-1:2006 + A1:2009
Description
Safety of machinery - Ergonomic design principles - Part 1:
Terminology and general principles
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Continues on next page
341
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Reference information
7.1 Applicable standards
Continued
Standard
EN 574:1996 + A1:2008
Description
Safety of machinery - Two-hand control devices - Functional aspects - Principles for design
Other standards
Standard
ANSI/RIA R15.06
ANSI/UL 1740
CAN/CSA Z 434-14
Description
Safety requirements for industrial robots and robot systems
Safety standard for robots and robotic equipment
Industrial robots and robot Systems - General safety requirements
342
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
7 Reference information
7.2 Unit conversion
7.2 Unit conversion
Converter table
Use the following table to convert units used in this manual.
Quantity
Length
Weight
Weight
Pressure
Force
Moment
Volume
Units
1 m
1 kg
1 g
1 bar
1 N
1 Nm
1 L
3.28 ft.
2.21 lb.
0.035 ounces
100 kPa
0.225 lbf
0.738 lbf-ft
0.264 US gal
39.37 in
14.5 psi
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
343
7 Reference information
7.3 Screw joints
7.3 Screw joints
General
This section describes how to tighten the various types of screw joints on the IRB
6620LX.
The instructions and torque values are valid for screw joints comprised of metallic materials and do not apply to soft or brittle materials.
UNBRAKO screws
UNBRAKO is a special type of screw recommended by ABB for certain screw joints.
It features special surface treatment (Gleitmo as described below) and is extremely resistant to fatigue.
Whenever used, this is specified in the instructions, and in such cases, no other type of replacement screw is allowed. Using other types of screws will void any warranty and may potentially cause serious damage or injury.
Gleitmo treated screws
Gleitmo is a special surface treatment to reduce the friction when tightening the screw joint. Screws treated with Gleitmo may be reused 3-4 times before the coating disappears. After this the screw must be discarded and replaced with a new one.
When handling screws treated with Gleitmo, protective gloves of nitrile rubber type should be used.
Screws lubricated in other ways
Screws lubricated with Molycote 1000 should only be used when specified in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure descriptions.
In such cases, proceed as follows:
1 Apply lubricant to the screw thread.
2 Apply lubricant between the plain washer and screw head.
3 Screw dimensions of M8 or larger must be tightened with a torque wrench.
Screw dimensions of M6 or smaller may be tightened without a torque wrench if this is done by trained and qualified personnel.
Lubricant
Molycote 1000 (molybdenum disulphide grease)
Article number
3HAC042472-001
Tightening torque
Before tightening any screw, note the following:
• Determine whether a standard tightening torque or special torque is to be applied. The standard torques are specified in the following tables. Any special torques are specified in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure descriptions.
Any special torque specified overrides the standard torque!
• Use the correct tightening torque for each type of screw joint.
• Only use correctly calibrated torque keys.
Continues on next page
344 Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Reference information
7.3 Screw joints
Continued
• Always tighten the joint by hand, and never use pneumatic tools.
• Use the correct tightening technique , that is do not jerk. Tighten the screw in a slow, flowing motion.
• Maximum allowed total deviation from the specified value is 10% !
Oil-lubricated screws with slotted or cross-recess head screws
The following table specifies the recommended standard tightening torque for oil-lubricated screws with slotted or cross-recess head screws.
Note
A special torque specified in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure overrides the standard torque.
Oil-lubricated screws with allen head screws
The following table specifies the recommended standard tightening torque for oil-lubricated screws with allen head screws.
Note
A special torque specified in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure overrides the standard torque.
Dimension
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
10
24
47
82
Tightening torque (Nm)
Class 8.8, oil-lubricated
Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (Nm)
Class 10.9, oil-lubricated
Class 12.9, oil-lubricated
6 -
-
34
67
115
-
40
80
140
200
400
680
290
560
960
340
670
1150
Lubricated screws (Molycote, Gleitmo or equivalent) with allen head screws
The following table specifies the recommended standard tightening torque for screws lubricated with Molycote 1000, Gleitmo 603 or equivalent with allen head screws.
Note
A special torque specified in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure overrides the standard torque.
Dimension
M8
Tightening torque (Nm)
Class 10.9, lubricated i
28
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Tightening torque (Nm)
Class 12.9, lubricated
35
Continues on next page
345
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
7 Reference information
7.3 Screw joints
Continued
Dimension Tightening torque (Nm)
Class 10.9, lubricated i
Tightening torque (Nm)
Class 12.9, lubricated
M10
M12
M16
55
96
235
70
120
280
M20 460 550 i
M24 790 950
Lubricated with Molycote 1000, Gleitmo 603 or equivalent
Water and air connectors
The following table specifies the recommended standard tightening torque for water and air connectors when one or both connectors are made of brass .
Note
A special torque specified in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure overrides the standard torque.
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
Dimension
15
20
40
70
Tightening torque Nm -
Nominal
Tightening torque Nm -
Min.
Tightening torque Nm -
Max.
12 8 15
10
15
30
55
20
25
50
90
346
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
7 Reference information
7.4 Weight specifications
7.4 Weight specifications
Definition
In installation, repair, and maintenance procedures, weights of the components handled are sometimes specified. All components exceeding 22 kg (50 lbs) are highlighted in this way.
To avoid injury, ABB recommends the use of a lifting accessory when handling components with a weight exceeding 22 kg. A wide range of lifting accessories and devices are available for each manipulator model.
Example
Following is an example of a weight specification in a procedure:
Action Note
CAUTION
The robot weighs 610 kg.
All lifting accessories used must be sized accordingly.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
347
7 Reference information
7.5 Standard tools
7.5 Standard tools
General
All service (repairs, maintenance, and installation) procedures contains lists of tools required to perform the specified activity.
All special tools required are listed directly in the procedures while all the tools that are considered standard are gathered in the standard toolkit and defined in the following table.
This way, the tools required are the sum of the standard toolkit and any tools listed in the instruction.
Contents, standard toolkit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Qty Tool
Ring-open-end spanner 8-19 mm
Socket head cap 5-17 mm
Torx socket no: 20-60
Box spanner set
Rem.
Torque wrench 10-100 Nm
Torque wrench 75-400 Nm
Ratchet head for torque wrench 1/2
Hexagon-headed screw M10x100
Hex bit socket head cap no. 14 socket 40 mm L=100 mm
Hex bit socket head cap no. 14 socket 40 mm L=20 mm To be shortened to 12 mm
Hex bit socket head cap no. 6 socket 40 mm L=145 mm
Hex bit socket head cap no. 6 socket 40mm bit L=220 mm
348
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
7 Reference information
7.6 Special tools
7.6 Special tools
General
All service instructions contain lists of tools required to perform the specified activity. The required tools are a sum of standard tools, defined in the section
, and of special tools, listed directly in the instructions and also gathered in this section.
Calibration equipment, Calibration Pendulum
The following table specifies the calibration equipment needed when calibrating the robot with the Calibration Pendulum method.
The robot is calibrated by either Calibration Pendulum or Axis Calibration at factory.
Always use the same calibration method as used at the factory.
Information about valid calibration method is found on the calibration label or in the calibration menu on the FlexPendant.
If no data is found related to standard calibration, Calibration Pendulum is used as default.
Description
Calibration Pendulum toolkit
Art. no.
3HAC15716-1
Note
Complete kit that also includes operating manual.
Calibration equipment, Axis Calibration
The following table specifies the calibration equipment needed when calibrating the robot with the Axis Calibration method.
The robot is calibrated by either Calibration Pendulum or Axis Calibration at factory.
Always use the same calibration method as used at the factory.
Information about valid calibration method is found on the calibration label or in the calibration menu on the FlexPendant.
If no data is found related to standard calibration, Calibration Pendulum is used as default.
Description Art. no.
Calibration tool box, Axis Calibration
3HAC055412-
001
Note
Delivered as a set of calibration tools.
Required if Axis Calibration is the valid calibration method for the robot.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
349
7 Reference information
7.7 Lifting accessories and lifting instructions
7.7 Lifting accessories and lifting instructions
General
Many repair and maintenance activities require different pieces of lifting accessories, which are specified in each procedure.
The use of each piece of lifting accessories is not detailed in the activity procedure, but in the instruction delivered with each piece of lifting accessories.
This implies that the instructions delivered with the lifting accessories should be stored for later reference.
350
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
8 Spare part lists
8.1 Spare part lists and illustrations
8 Spare part lists
8.1 Spare part lists and illustrations
Location
Spare parts and exploded views are not included in the manual but delivered as a separate document for registered users on myABB Business Portal, www.myportal.abb.com
.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
351
This page is intentionally left blank
9 Circuit diagram
9.1 Circuit diagrams
9 Circuit diagram
9.1 Circuit diagrams
Overview
The circuit diagrams are not included in this manual, but are available for registered users on myABB Business Portal, www.myportal.abb.com
.
See the article numbers in the tables below.
Controllers
Product
Circuit diagram - IRC5
Circuit diagram - IRC5 Compact
Article numbers for circuit diagrams
3HAC024480-011
3HAC049406-003
Circuit diagram - IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller
3HAC026871-020
Circuit diagram - Euromap 3HAC024120-004
Circuit diagram - Spot welding cabinet 3HAC057185-001
Robots
Product
Circuit diagram - IRB 120
Circuit diagram - IRB 140 type C
Circuit diagram - IRB 260
Circuit diagram - IRB 360
Circuit diagram - IRB 460
Circuit diagram - IRB 660
Circuit diagram - IRB 760
Circuit diagram - IRB 1200
Circuit diagram - IRB 1410
Circuit diagram - IRB 1600/1660
Circuit diagram - IRB 1520
Circuit diagram - IRB 2400
Circuit diagram - IRB 2600
Circuit diagram - IRB 4400/4450S
Circuit diagram - IRB 4600
Circuit diagram - IRB 6400RF
Circuit diagram - IRB 6600 type A
Circuit diagram - IRB 6600 type B
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Article numbers for circuit diagrams
3HAC031408-003
3HAC6816-3
3HAC025611-001
3HAC028647-009
3HAC036446-005
3HAC025691-001
3HAC025691-001
3HAC046307-003
3HAC2800-3
3HAC021351-003
3HAC039498-007
3HAC6670-3
3HAC029570-007
3HAC9821-1
3HAC029038-003
3HAC8935-1
3HAC13347-1
3HAC025744-001
3HAC13347-1
3HAC025744-001
Continues on next page
353
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
9 Circuit diagram
9.1 Circuit diagrams
Continued
Product
Circuit diagram - IRB 6620
Circuit diagram - IRB 6620 / IRB 6620LX
Circuit diagram - IRB 6640
Circuit diagram - IRB 6650S
Circuit diagram - IRB 6660
Circuit diagram - IRB 6700
Circuit diagram - IRB 7600
Circuit diagram - Product.ProductName
Circuit diagram - IRB 910SC
Article numbers for circuit diagrams
3HAC025090-001
3HAC025090-001
3HAC025744-001
3HAC13347-1
3HAC025744-001
3HAC025744-001
3HAC029940-001
3HAC043446-005
3HAC13347-1
3HAC025744-001
3HAC050778-003
3HAC056159-002
354
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
Index
Index
A aluminum
ambient humidity
ambient temperature
assessment of hazards and risks, 18
calibration tool
procedure on FlexPendant, 327 protective cover and protection plug, 325, 327
B batteries
battery pack
brake release board, replacement, 230
brakes
C
cabling, robot, 116 cabling between robot and controller, 116
calibrating
calibration
calibration position
scales, 303 calibration scales, 303
carbon dioxide extinguisher, 20
cast iron
changing oil
connecting the robot and controller, cabling, 116
connection
copper
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
D
damage to mechanical stop, 139
dimensions
E
environmental information, 337
ESD
damage elimination, 31 sensitive equipment, 31
extra equipment
F
fastener quality for extra equipment, 104
fitting equipment on robot, 102
FlexPendant
jogging to calibration position, 335
updating revolution counters, 317
foundation
G gearbox
gearbox axis 6, replacement, 286
gearboxes
grease
H hanging
height
humidity
I
information labels location, 137
inspecting
inspecting oil levels
installing equipment on robot, 102
355
Index
L labels
Lithium
lubrication
amount in gearboxes, 143 type of lubrication, 143
M magnesium
motor axis 1, replacement, 236
motor axis 2, replacement, 241
motor axis 3, replacement, 248
motor axis 4, replacement, 255
motor axis 5, replacement, 260
motor axis 6, replacement, 265
N
nation specific regulations, 17
negative directions, axes, 304
neodymium
NiCad
nodular iron
O oil
oil change
oil level
P pedestal
plastic
positive directions, axes, 304
protection classes, 52 protection type, 52
protective equipment, 24 protective wear, 24
356
R
region specific regulations, 17
replacement
replacing
requirements on foundation, 51
responsibility and validity, 17
revolution counters
robot
protection class, 52 protection types, 52
rubber
S safety
signals, 38 signals in manual, 38 symbols, 38
safety equipment
safety risk
safety signals
securing the robot to foundation, attachment screws, 98
signals
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
SMB battery
speed
start of robot in cold environments, 118
steel
symbols
system integrator requirements, 17
system parameter
T temperatures
testing
three-position enabling device, 28
tools
Calibration Pendulum, 349 for service, 349
troubleshooting
U
updating revolution counters, 314
upper arm
V
validity and responsibility, 17
velocity
W
Z zero position
Index
Product manual - IRB 6620LX
3HAC035737-001 Revision: P
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
357
ABB AB, Robotics
Robotics and Motion
S-721 68 VÄSTERÅS, Sweden
Telephone +46 (0) 21 344 400
ABB AS, Robotics
Robotics and Motion
Nordlysvegen 7, N-4340 BRYNE, Norway
Box 265, N-4349 BRYNE, Norway
Telephone: +47 22 87 2000
ABB Engineering (Shanghai) Ltd.
Robotics and Motion
No. 4528 Kangxin Highway
PuDong District
SHANGHAI 201319, China
Telephone: +86 21 6105 6666
ABB Inc.
Robotics and Motion
1250 Brown Road
Auburn Hills, MI 48326
USA
Telephone: +1 248 391 9000 abb.com/robotics
© Copyright 2009-2018 ABB. All rights reserved.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 18 Safe access
- 18 Safe handling
- 18 Safe design
- 22 Spot welding cabinet
- 51 Side mounted
- 51 Suspended
- 57 Sections at delivery
- 58 Sections to assembly
- 90 Fitting the lifting and turning tool
- 90 Turning the robot
- 95 Brake release at base
- 96 Brake release at frame
- 100 Gravity Alpha
- 101 Gamma Rotation
- 111 Improve the stability of the installation
- 111 Reduce the acceleration
- 112 Optimize the servo control
- 116 Robot cable, power
- 116 Robot cable, signals
- 174 Oil spills from gearboxes
- 175 Instructions for rinsing with water
- 175 Instructions for steam or high pressure water cleaning
- 238 Preparations before removing the motor
- 239 Removing the motor and coupling
- 272 Gearbox with multi-tooth coupling
- 273 Gearbox with elastomer coupling
- 296 Cable layout, material handling - with hydraulic hose
- 297 Cable layout, spot welding
- 300 Calibration Pendulum method
- 300 Axis Calibration method
- 301 Levelmeter calibration - alternative method
- 302 The resolver values are changed
- 302 The revolution counter memory is lost
- 302 The robot is rebuilt
- 302 Axis 1 calibration
- 321 Fine calibration routine
- 321 Reference calibration routine
- 321 Update revolution counters
- 321 Validation
- 323 Check prior to usage
- 324 Periodic check of the calibration tool
- 330 Safety controller not synchronized - SafeMove message
- 331 Unsynchronized speed exceeded - SafeMove message while saving robot data
- 331 Unsynchronized time limit expired - SafeMove message anytime during Axis Calibration routine